Project Manual
for
Audi Birmingham
Birmingham, Alabama
owner:
Sonic Automotive Inc.
architect:
Praxis3 LLC
1776 Peachtree Road
Suite 400 South
Atlanta, GA 30309
(404) 875-4500
Project No. 13036
Date: ???? 2014
Released for Bid and Permit
Copyright © 2014 – Praxis3 LLC
All reports, plans, specifications, computer files, field data, notes and other documents and
instruments prepared by Praxis3 LLC shall remain the property of Praxis3 LLC. Praxis3 LLC shall
retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights including copyright thereto.
This project manual and the associated drawings are not to be reproduced or copied in whole
or in part. They are only to be used for the project and sites specifically identified herein and
are not to be used on any other project unless approved in writing by Praxis3 LLC.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA
PRAXIS 3-13036
00 0002-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
???? 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION NO. TITLE
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 2100 Allowances
Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements
Section 01 3001 Responsibility Chart
Section 01 3002 Submittal Cover Sheet
Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements
Section 01 4150 Special Inspections
Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 6000 Product Requirements
Section 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements
Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
Section 03 0505 Underslab Vapor Barrier
Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 03 3511 Concrete Floor Finishes – Polished Concrete
Section 03 3511.14 Concrete Floor Finishes – Ashford Formula
DIVISION 4
MASONRY
Section 04 2000 Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5
METALS
Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing
Section 05 2100 Steel Joists Framing
Section 05 3100 Steel Decking
Section 05 4000 Cold Formed Metal Framing
Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications
Section 05 5100 Metal Stairs
DIVISION 6
WOOD, PLASTICS and COMPOSITES
Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry
Section 06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework
DIVISION 7
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 1400 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
Section 07 1616 Crystalline Waterproofing
Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation
Section 07 2110 Board and Batt Insulation Climate Zone Table
Section 07 2119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation
Section 07 2500 Weather Barriers
Section 07 4113 Metal Roof Panels
Section 07 4230 Textured Metal Plate Wall Panels
Section 07 5423.10 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing – 60 mil
Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07 7100 Roof Specialties
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA
PRAXIS 3-13036
Section 07 7200 Roof Accessories
Section 07 8400 Firestopping
Section 07 9005 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8
OPENINGS
Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors
Section 08 3013 High Speed Roll-Up Door
Section 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels
Section 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors
Section 08 3326 Overhead Coiling Grilles
Section 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
Section 08 7100 Door Hardware
Section 08 8000 Glazing
Section 08 8300 Mirrors
Section 08 9200 Louvered Equipment Enclosures
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09 3000 Tiling
Section 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings
Section 09 5470 Metal Plank Ceiling System
Section 09 6500 Resilient Flooring
Section 09 6800 Carpeting
Section 09 6813 Tile Carpeting
Section 09 7200 Wall Coverings
Section 09 9000 Painting and Coating
Section 09 9110 Paint Schedule
Section 09 9600 High-Performance Coatings
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section 10 1101 Visual Display Boards
Section 10 1400 Signage
Section 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments
Section 10 2800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
Section 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties
Section 10 5100 Lockers
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
Section 12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds
Section 12 2492 Motorized Roller Shades
Section 12 3600 Countertops
Section 12 4840 Foot Grid Entrance Systems
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
Section 31 3116 Termite Control
00 0002-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
???? 2014
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA
PRAXIS 3-13036
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and Gates
End of Table of Contents
00 0002-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
???? 2014
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 2100-1
ALLOWANCES
???? 2014
SECTION 01 2100
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cash allowances.
B.
Inspecting and testing allowances.
C.
Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification
procedures.
1.03 CASH ALLOWANCES
A.
Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less
applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes.
B.
Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site,
including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from
damage; and labor for installation and finishing.
C.
Architect Responsibilities:
1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and
installers.
2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.
3. Prepare Change Order.
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers, and installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations.
3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with
designated supplier and installer.
4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.
5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit
claims for transportation damage.
E.
Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.
1.04 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES
A.
Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing
agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results.
B.
Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances:
1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency.
2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document
requirements.
3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect.
C.
Payment Procedures:
1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for
payment.
2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect.
D.
Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order.
1.05 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE
A.
Section 08 7100: Include the stipulated sum of $450 for purchase and delivery of per door leaf
hardware.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 2100-2
ALLOWANCES
???? 2014
B.
Contingency Allowance: Include stipulated sum/price included in the Bid Forms for use upon
the Owner's instructions.
C.
Section 01 5000-TEMPORARY FACILITES AND CONTROLS: Include the stipulated sum of
$$1,000.00 for purchase and delivery of the Project Sign. If the Project Sign is included in the
Drawings this allowance is void..
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 3000-1
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electronic document submittal service.
B.
Progress meetings.
C.
Construction progress schedule.
D.
Progress photographs.
E.
Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
F.
Number of copies of submittals.
G.
Submittal procedures.
H.
Punch List.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.
B.
Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of
schedules.
C.
Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
D.
Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE
A.
All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic
(PDF) format and transmitted via TANGENTWORKS500, an Internet-based submittal service
that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and
notifies addressees via email.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents
(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for
payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant
wishes to make part of the project record.
2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.
3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.
4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the
service at no extra charge.
5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software
that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,
www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software
capability is provided by the service provider.
6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be
reviewed.
7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts,
oversized submittals (too large to be scanned and transmitted via TANGENTWORKS 550)
and samples.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect a list of names and email addresses for any party
that should have access to the project website. This includes people within their company plus
any Subcontractors working on the project requiring access to project information. The cost for
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 3000-2
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Taangentworks is not a cost to the Contractor so the Contractor is encouraged to provide all
names and email addresses.
C.
Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is
responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.
3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D.
Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Maintenance of Close Out and Record documents.
11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
12. Other business relating to Work.
E.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A.
Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
B.
If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
C.
Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include dates for all submittals.
2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
D.
Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.04 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.
B.
In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:
1. Completion of site clearing.
2. Excavations in progress.
3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.
4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.
5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.
6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.
C.
Views:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
3.
4.
01 3000-3
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date
of Substantial Completion.
Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.
Provide factual presentation.
Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of
field, and minimum distortion.
D.
Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide
files unaltered by photo editing software.
1. Delivery Medium: Via email.
2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.
3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per
page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.
E.
Photographer Quality Prints: Full color; three prints of each view.
1. Glossy; smooth texture; white tint; single weight; contrast grade 4, extra hard.
2. Size: 8 x 10 inch (200 x 250 mm); mounted for binder and tabs.
3. Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project, contract number, phase, orientation
of view, date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and photographer's
numbered identification of exposure.
4. Deliver prints with each Application for Payment with transmittal letter specified in this
section.
3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B.
Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1. CAD files may be obtained from the Architect for an administrative fee of $500.00 per
drawing per subcontractor and execution of a Standard Hold Harmless/Indemnification
Agreement specified in this section. NOTE: These files remain the property of the
Architect and may not be used for other projects. Contact the Architect's Project Manager
for more information and to order CAD files.
C.
Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D.
After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT
SUBMITTALS.
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Manufacturer's instructions.
5. Manufacturer's field reports.
6. Other types indicated.
B.
Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be
taken.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
01 3000-4
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Operation and maintenance data.
Warranties.
Bonds.
Other types as indicated.
Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A.
Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be
returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.
1. Unless the submittal is a phsical sample, all submittals must be provided in electronic
format utilizing TANGENTWORKS 500. The General Contractor will upload submittals,
including all subcontractor submittals, in PDF format and notify the Architect. The
Architect will review and markup the electronic submittals and notify the General
Contractor when complete.
B.
Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 7800.
C.
Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.
B.
Transmit each submittal with approved form.
C.
Group submittals required to evaluate a complete installation or color selection.
D.
Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
E.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
F.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
G.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
H.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
I.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
J.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
K.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
L.
Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
M. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
N.
Include submittal requirements from each specification section with indication submittal is
complete.
O.
Contractor submittals that have obviously not been reviewed will be returned without action by
the Architect.
END OF SECTION
Audi Birmingham
NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.
See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used
Items
Designed or
Selected by:
Design
Document
Furnished by:
Installed by:
Notes
Contractor Owner
Contractor Owner
EXTERIOR
GENERAL
It is the responsibility of the General
Contractor to provide a complete scope of
work for all incoming utilities. If a
discrepancy is found or a trade is not
coordinated between the civil engineer
and the MEP engineer this must be
brought to attention during the bid in the
form of an RFI. If no RFI's are asked you
are acknowledging that you have
coordinated all trades and are providing a
complete package of work.
Site preparation
CE
CE
X
X
Drives and Parking Lot
CE
CE
X
X
Site lighting including landscape and
entrance and all lamps
EE / LA
EE
X
X
Exterior electrical outlets
EE / LA
EE
X
X
Empty conduits for future electrical
EE
EE
X
X
Building Signage
SC
A / SC / EE
X
X
X
X
Electrical by Contractor, In-wall blocking
by Contractor. Signs and installation of
sign by Sign Contractor. (Final electrical
connection by GC).
Ground mounted signs
SC
A / SC / EE
X
X
X
X
Electrical by Contractor. Signs, foundation
and installation of sign by Sign
Contractor. (Final electrical connection by
GC).
Architectural Paving / Sidewalks
adjacent to buildings
A
A
X
X
Sidewalks other than above
CE
CE
X
X
Vehicle Display Pads
CE
CE
X
X
Landscaping Irrigation System
LS
LS
X
X
Landscaping
CE
CE
X
X
Hose Bibbs
CE / ME
CE / ME
X
X
Landscape Maintenance Equip.
O
O
X
X
Lot Sweeper
O
O
X
X
Dumpster
O
O
X
X
Dumpster Enclosure
CE
CE
X
X
Underground conduit for CATV if any.
O / AV
CE / EE
X
X
Civil Engineer and Electrical Engineer to
coordinate w/ Owner on needs of facility.
EE will indicate empty conduit from ROW
to building if within scope.
Blocking for satellite dish if any.
O / AV
EE
X
X
Electrical Engineer to coordinate w/
Owner on needs of facility.
Page 1 of 5
Audi Birmingham
NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.
See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used
Items
Designed or
Selected by:
Design
Document
Furnished by:
Installed by:
Notes
Contractor Owner
Contractor Owner
Electrical Transformer
EE
CE / EE
X
X
Gas Meter
ME
CE / ME
X
X
Water Meters
ME
CE / ME
X
X
Oil Water Separator
ME
CE / ME
X
X
MV
MV
Wall, base, floor, and ceiling finishes
A
A
X
X
Vinyl wall covering
A
A
X
X
Doors and frames
A
A
X
X
A/C
C
X
X
Contractor to include an allowance and
provide submittal to Architect for review.
Door keying information
O
O/C
X
X
Contractor to coordinate with the Owner
on keying patterns
Key registry and key cabinet
A
A
X
X
Carpeting and pad
A
A
X
X
VCT floors
A
A
X
X
Tile Floors
A
A
X
X
Epoxy Floors
A
A
X
X
Whiteboards, tackboards, etc.
A
A
X
X
Public restroom vanities
A
A
X
X
Millwork
A
A
X
X
Furniture including sofas, tables,
desks and chairs
O
A / FS
X
X
Furniture including file cabinets.
O
FS
X
X
Small Office Machines
O
O
X
X
Electrical wiring for office machines
O
EE
High Density Filing System
O
A
INTERIOR
Interior Display Millwork
Door Hardware
X
X
Owner Furnished, Contractor to
coordinate installation by Manufacturer's
Vendor. Provide electrical as indicated and
make final connections.
Architect to show basic furniture layout.
Owner specifies furniture pieces.
Contractor responsible for coordination of
electrical with final furniture location and
type.
X
X
Page 2 of 5
X
X
Architect to show basic furniture layout.
Owner and Furniture Vendor specifies
furniture pieces. Contractor to coordinate
installation with Vendor.
Audi Birmingham
NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.
See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used
Items
Designed or
Selected by:
Design
Document
Furnished by:
Installed by:
Notes
Contractor Owner
Contractor Owner
X
X
Parts Storage Units by Owner. GC shall
coordinate lighting and sprinkler layout
with approved Storage Unit layout from
Owner.
X
Signage and Graphics by Owner, Elec by
GC. Final connection of electrical by GC.
Parts storage units
O
ES
All fixtures, trim accessories including
vanities, toilet partitions, and nondecorative mirrors
A
A
X
X
Toilet Accessories
A
A
X
X
Manufacturer Signage and Graphics
including banners, displays, large wall
graphics.
O
O
Room Signage as indicated on door
schedule.
A
A
X
X
Room Signage for Offices, etc
O
O
X
X
Vending Machines
A
A
X
X
Architect to show general layout only.
Contractor to provide all necessary
electrical connections.
Kitchen Equipment including,
microwaves, coffee makers
A
O
X
X
Architect to show general layout only.
Contractor to provide all necessary
electrical and water connections.
Kitchen Equipment (built-in) including
refrigerators, dishwashers, garbage
disposals, undercounter icemakers or
undercounter refrigerators if any.
A
A
Cash registers
O
O
X
X
Cash Registers by Owner. Electrical by
GC.
A / AV
AV
X
X
Architect to show general layout only. AV
Consultant to specify equipment.
Contractor to provide wall blocking,
support brackets and electrical as
required.
AV
EE
X
X
Electrical Engineer to locate TV's on plan.
Contractor to provide empty conduits with
pullstrings and boxes for Owner's vendor
to use.
TV Brackets
A
A
X
X
Contractor to provide TV / VCR brackets
as identified on the drawings.
Flat Panel TVs
A
A
Telephones
O
EE
Televisions, VCRs, etc.
Conduit for Televisions, VCR, conduits
for satellite dish connection, etc.
X
X
X
X
X
Page 3 of 5
(none at this time)
X
X
GC to provide equipment as specified in
the Project Manual. Provide electrical as
required and coordinate all dimensions
with the Millwork Sub.
X
Contractor to coordinate installation
requirements with Owner equipment. This
includes blocking and location for
electrical and CATV boxes.
X
Electrical Engineer to locate telephones on
plan. Contractor to provide empty
conduits with pullstrings and boxes for
Owner's vendor to use.
Audi Birmingham
NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.
See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used
Items
Designed or
Selected by:
Design
Document
Computer Outlets
O
EE
Security System
O
O
Sound / Public Address systems
AV
Wiring for sound system and public
address systems
Key Machines (if any)
Furnished by:
Installed by:
Contractor Owner
Contractor Owner
X
Electrical Engineer to locate computers on
plan. Contractor to provide empty
conduits with pullstrings and boxes for
Owner's vendor to use.
X
X
Conduit by Alarm System Subcontractor,
Electrical service by Contractor to one
location. Contractor to coordinate
scheduling with Owner's vendor for their
installation of conduit.
AV
X
X
Electrical power to Tel/Data closet by
Contractor. Wiring for speakers by
Owner's AV subcontractor. EE will indicate
locations for open ceilings which may
require empty conduit for vendor provided
cabling.
AV
AV
X
X
O
A
X
X
Architect to show general layout only.
Electrical as required by Contractor
Shop Equipment including
compressors, tool boxes, etc.
O / ES
ES / EE
X
X
Architect to show general layout only.
Electrical as required by Contractor. The
2" empty PVC conduit from the inground
lift to the wall is by the Equipment
Supplier.
Above-ground Lifts
O / ES
ES / EE
X
X
Equipment installer to furnish and install
above-ground lifts. Contractor to
coordinate the installation.
In-ground alignment rack
O / ES
ES / EE
X
Contractor to install recessed pit with
drain, edge angle and conduit to/fm pit.
Owners equipment vendor will provide
equipment and install equipment. GC
shall coordinate installation with Owner's
vendor.
O/ES
ES
X
Owner's vendor to provide all compressed
air piping.
O / ES
ES / ME
X
X
ME
ME
X
X
O / ES
ES / EE
Compressed Air Drops
Water in shop
Above Ground Carbon Monoxide
Exhaust System
Oil, Waste Oil, and ATF distribution
system
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
X
X
Final Electrical Connections to
Equipment, Signs, Fixtures, etc.
Page 4 of 5
CO system by GC. Final electrical
connections by GC. GC to also coordinate
installation including all wall and / or roof
penetrations.
X
X
Contractor to provide electrical service as
indicated. Owner's vendor to provide all
equipment and installation.
X
X
Contractor to make all final connections to
all electrical devices.
Audi Birmingham
NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.
See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used
Items
Designed or
Selected by:
Design
Document
Furnished by:
Installed by:
Notes
Contractor Owner
Contractor Owner
Shop ventilation, AC, fresh air makeup
ME
ME
X
X
Plumbing fixtures including sinks,
toilets, showers, mop sinks and eye
washes
ME
ME
X
X
A
A
X
X
Light fixtures including lamps
A / EE
EE
X
X
Dimmer system for public areas (if
any)
A / EE
EE
X
X
Emergency Lighting
EE
EE
X
X
Employee Lockers
A
A
X
X
Security grills and fire shutters
A
A
X
X
ME
C
X
X
Fire Extinguishers
A
A
X
X
First Aid Cabinet and Supplies
O
O
X
X
Time Clock
O
O / EE
X
X
Stainless steel countertops
A
A
X
X
Closet shelving
A
A
X
X
Interior Plants and Planters
O
O
Decorative Concrete Coating
A
A
X
X
Car Wash underground Tanks
ME
ME
X
X
A
A
X
X
Janitor closet hardware including mop
racks.
Fire protection system
Key Drop Box
X
Abbreviation
Owner
Contractor
Architect
Structural Engineer
Mechanical Engineer
Electrical Engineer
Civil Engineer
Landscape Architect
Landscape Supplier
Signage Contractor
Audio Visual Contractor
Furniture Supplier
Equipment Supplier
Manufacturer Vendor
O
C
A
SE
ME
EE
CE
LA
LS
SC
AV
FS
ES
MV
End of Chart
Page 5 of 5
Mop rack by Contractor. Shelving by
Owner.
Design-build based on Mechanical
Engineers specifications.
X
Electrical as required by Contractor
JOB NAME
JOB NUMBER
ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR
OWNER
SUBCONTRACTOR/VENDOR
SPECIFICATION SECTION
ITEM
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
SUBMITTAL DATE
ARCHITECT STAMP
Audi Birmingham
13036
Praxis3
Sonic Automotive
CONTRACTOR STAMP
CONSULTANT STAMP
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 4000-1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
References and standards.
B.
Quality assurance submittals.
C.
Mock-ups.
D.
Control of installation.
E.
Tolerances.
F.
Testing and inspection services.
G.
Manufacturers' field services.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 00 3100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.
B.
Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public
authorities.
C.
Section 01 2100 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services.
D.
Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
E.
Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;
2008.
B.
ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2013a.
C.
ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012.
D.
ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;
2012a.
E.
ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing,
or Special Inspection; 2013c.
F.
ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names
of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction
Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
B.
Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose
of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents, or for Owner's information.
C.
Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and
to Contractor.
1. Include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
01 4000-2
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f.
Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test/inspection.
i.
Results of test/inspection.
j.
Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.
Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the
limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
D.
Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to Architect.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
F.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or
for Owner.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
G.
Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for
Owner.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect
or Owner.
1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A.
For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included
in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable
codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C.
Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D.
Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until
Substantial Completion.
E.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect before proceeding.
F.
Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A.
As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for
services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 4000-3
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
B.
Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
C.
Contractor Employed Agency:
1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021,
ASTM C1077, and ASTM C1093.
2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.
3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST
established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality
assurance program.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E.
Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective
product specification sections.
B.
Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C.
Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
D.
Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification
sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
See individual specification sections for testing required.
B.
Testing Agency Duties:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
01 4000-4
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of services.
Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.
Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C.
Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers' facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections
required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Architect.
F.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and
balance of equipment and other work as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A.
Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B.
If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will
direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 5000-1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary utilities.
B.
Temporary telecommunications services.
C.
Temporary sanitary facilities.
D.
Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E.
Security requirements.
F.
Vehicular access and parking.
G.
Waste removal facilities and services.
H.
Project identification sign.
I.
Field offices.
1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A.
Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation
required for construction purposes.
B.
Existing facilities may not be used.
C.
New permanent facilities may not be used.
D.
Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A.
Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B.
Telecommunications services shall include:
1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with
necessary software and laser printer.
2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.
3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.
4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use.
5. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with dedicated phone
line.
6. Facsimile Service: Fax-to-email software on personal computer.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B.
Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.05 BARRIERS
A.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas
that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and
demolition, if any.
B.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building, if any..
C.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.06 FENCING
A.
Construction: Contractor's option.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
01 5000-2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
???? 2014
Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
gates with locks.
1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate
acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and
maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,
and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware
and locks.
1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES (ONLY FOR RENOVATIONS WITH OWNER OCCUPANCY DURING
CONSTRUCTION)
A.
Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from
Owner-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas,
and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
B.
Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and
sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:
1. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90.
2. Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.09 SECURITY
A.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B.
Coordinate with Owner's security program. (For renovation projects with owner occupying the
building)
1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A.
Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,
and access for emergency vehicles.
B.
Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
C.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E.
Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic.
F.
Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.11 WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and
orderly condition.
B.
Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.
C.
If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide project identification sign of design and construction if indicated on Drawings.
B.
If not on the drawings, provide one eight by eight plywood sign on four by four posts. Sign
graphic design will be provided by the Architect. Include an allowance of on thousand dollars for
the plywood and graphic design production. Intallation and four by four post will are not included
in the allowance and are the contractor's sole responsibility.
C.
Erect on site at location established by Architect.
D.
No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 5000-3
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
???? 2014
1.13 FIELD OFFICES
A.
Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.
B.
Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
C.
Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet (10 m) from existing and new structures, if
possible.
1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A.
Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B.
Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as
indicated.
C.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D.
Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
E.
Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 6000-1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General product requirements.
B.
Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C.
Product option requirements.
D.
Substitution limitations and procedures.
E.
Procedures for Owner-supplied products.
F.
Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior
to bid date.
B.
Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.
B.
Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
C.
MSDS: Do NOT submit MSDS sheets. Submittal including MSDS sheets may be returned
without action.
D.
Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
E.
Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A.
Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B.
DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.
C.
Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:
1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.
2. Have longer documented life span under normal use.
3. Result in less construction waste.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
01 6000-2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.
D.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.
E.
Motors: Refer to Section 22 0513, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in
individual specification sections.
F.
Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.
G.
Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot (2 m) cord and plug including grounding connector for
connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification
sections.
2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Requests for substitutions will not be considered during the Bid period. Bidders can list
substitutions for consideration on the Bid Form in the Alternatives sections. Substitutions will
not be included in the BASE BID.
B.
Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement.
C.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
D.
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the
Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
E.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
F.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Substitution Submittals will be transmitted using TANGENTWORKS 550.
2. Submit one copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.
3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 6000-3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to
Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient
items.
5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.
B.
Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with
Owner.
3. Handle, store, install and finish products.
4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
E.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
F.
Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F.
Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
G.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
H.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
I.
Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
J.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
K.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7000-1
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B.
Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal,
and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.
C.
Cutting and patching.
D.
Surveying for laying out the work.
E.
Cleaning and protection.
F.
Starting of systems and equipment.
G.
Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H.
Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
I.
General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B.
Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C.
Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.
D.
Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions.
E.
Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.
F.
Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties and bonds.
G.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;
2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and
locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C.
Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
D.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located
and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance
coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
01 7000-2
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in the City and in the State in which the Project is located.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Use of explosives is not permitted.
B.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
C.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
D.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
E.
Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage
from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.
3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or
clays.
4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly
apply corrective measures.
F.
Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
G.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B.
Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C.
Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G.
After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A.
New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B.
Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
01 7000-3
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01 6000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D.
Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E.
Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
F.
Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
prior to commencing work of the section.
B.
Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of meeting date.
D.
Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A.
Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B.
Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C.
Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D.
Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
E.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
F.
Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
G.
Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
H.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7000-4
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
I.
Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
J.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
K.
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B.
Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 ALTERATIONS (ONLY APPLICABLE FOR RENOVATION PROJECTS)
A.
Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still
occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in
Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.
C.
Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for
replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior
enclosure weatherproof.
2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by
alterations work.
D.
Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace
with new construction specified.
2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,
and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if
necessary for successful application of new finish.
5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged
surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible, minimum
requirements will be not visible from a distance of 10 feet.
E.
Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and
Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new
construction.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or
provide access panel.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
01 7000-5
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment
as required.
Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
for service.
a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize
duration of outages and coordinate outages with all building users.
b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub
and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new
construction.
F.
Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch in accordance with Cutting and Patching for new Work.
G.
Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and
make recommendation to Architect.
2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework
floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more occurs in existing work, submit
recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request
instructions.
4. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
H.
Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the
surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch
so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.
I.
Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:
1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces
to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent
finishes.
2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and
refinish to match.
J.
Clean existing systems and equipment.
K.
Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;
do not burn or bury.
L.
Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
M. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B.
See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C.
Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
01 7000-6
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
D.
Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to
original condition.
E.
At new work, employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture
resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
F.
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
G.
Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
I.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids
with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
J.
Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair
substrate prior to repairing finish.
3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D.
Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose
off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
G.
Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7000-7
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
D.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
E.
Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H.
Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to
date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
C.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
D.
Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
and instruction of owner personnel.
E.
Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual
with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F.
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
G.
Video Recordings: Submit two digital video recordings of each denonstration and training
session for Owner's subsequent use.
1. Format: DVD Disc.
2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.13 FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion.
1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.
B.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
D.
Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
E.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
F.
Clean filters of operating equipment.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7000-8
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
???? 2014
G.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
H.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
I.
Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;
dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
C.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's review.
D.
Prepare and submit to the Architect a list of incomplete and non-conforming work prior to
Architects Substantial Completion Inspection.
E.
Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
F.
Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
G.
Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
3.15 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B.
Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever
is longer.
C.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in speification sections for one year
from date of Substantial Completion.
D.
Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
and lubricate as required.
E.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
F.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7419-1
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
???? 2014
SECTION 01 7419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.
B.
Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C.
Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as
economically feasible.
D.
Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports at a minimum with each pay request;
all landfill disposal, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the
cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.
E.
Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.
2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
F.
Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory
requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to
legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.
B.
Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,
packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and
demolition operations.
C.
Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,
toxicity or reactivity.
D.
Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,
corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.
E.
Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of
exposure.
F.
Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and
remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.
G.
Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture
into a new product for reuse by others.
H.
Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other
discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include
burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.
I.
Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
J.
Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
K.
Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by
others.
L.
Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well
production run-off water.
M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning
from the first time they become waste.
N.
Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7419-2
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
???? 2014
O.
Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
P.
Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.
Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal
procedures, and project documentation.
B.
See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal
facilities and services.
C.
See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and
handling.
D.
See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and
patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and
overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B.
Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each
subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.
C.
Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,
salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
project.
D.
Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-bid meeting.
2. Pre-construction meeting.
3. Regular job-site meetings.
E.
Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,
salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.
1. Provide containers as required.
2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.
3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to
avoid contamination of materials.
F.
Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable
regulations.
G.
Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products
in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified
materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to
prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
H.
Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for
reuse.
I.
Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7800-1
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
???? 2014
SECTION 01 7800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Project Record Documents.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
C.
Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment
bonds, warranty, and correction of work.
B.
Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,
product data, and samples.
C.
Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
D.
Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E.
Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
C.
Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D.
Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
3.
F.
01 7800-2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
???? 2014
Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B.
Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C.
Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D.
Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A.
For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
B.
Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C.
Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
D.
Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B.
Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
D.
Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
E.
Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7800-3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
???? 2014
F.
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
G.
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
H.
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
I.
Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
J.
Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities
to be maintained in storage.
K.
Include test and balancing reports.
L.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,
with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.
B.
Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for
each system.
C.
Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
D.
Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
E.
Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with
durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,
correlate data into related consistent groupings.
F.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
G.
Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.
H.
Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on
the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in
each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.
I.
Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents
on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and
major component parts of equipment.
J.
Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
K.
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
L.
Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
M. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
01 7800-4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
???? 2014
f.
3.
Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
N.
Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for
insertion of data.
O.
Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products
and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A.
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B.
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C.
Co-execute submittals when required.
D.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E.
Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders
with durable plastic covers.
F.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name
of responsible company principal.
G.
Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which
specified, and the name of product or work item.
H.
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,
supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 0505-1
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
???? 2014
SECTION 03 0505
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement of
concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
B.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Underslab Vapor Barrier:
1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms (0.6 ng/(s m2 Pa)), maximum.
2. Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A.
3. Thickness: _____ mils (10 mm).
4. Basis of Design:
a. Reef Industries, Inc. Gryffolyn Type 105
b. Fortifiber corporation, Moistop Ultra 15.
c. Raven Industires, Vapor Block 15.
d. Stego Industries, LLC, Stego Wrap 15 mil.
e. W.R. Grace Construction Products, FlorPrufe 120
f.
W.R. Meadows, Inc. PERMINATOR Underslap Vapor Mat 15.
g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,
for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before
proceeding with installation of vapor barrier.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.
B.
Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation
walls.
C.
Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
D.
Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and
follow manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
F.
03 0505-2
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
???? 2014
Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete formwork.
B.
Concrete building frame members.
C.
Concrete for composite floor construction.
D.
Elevated concrete slabs.
E.
Floors and slabs on grade.
F.
Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls.
G.
Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for pre-engineered building.
H.
Concrete reinforcement.
I.
Joint devices associated with concrete work.
J.
Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases,
thrust blocks, and manholes.
K.
Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and
polishing.
B.
Section 07 9513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
D.
Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
B.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
C.
ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete;
American Concrete Institute International; 1998 (Reapproved 2004).
D.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
2010.
E.
ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (Errata 2007).
F.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
G.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
H.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
I.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001
(Reapproved 2008).
J.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2011.
K.
ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
L.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
M. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,
for Concrete; 2007.
N.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.
O.
ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009.
P.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.
Q.
ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2012a.
R.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013.
S.
ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.
T.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
U.
ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2012.
V.
ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
W. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete; 2013.
X.
ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.
Y.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete; 2012.
Z.
ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2010.
AA. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to
Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).
AB. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2013.
AC. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012.
AD. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
AE. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
AF. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; Corps of
Engineers; 1974.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility
with floor covering adhesives.
C.
Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete
Mixtures.
D.
Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
E.
Samples: Submit two, 12 inch (305 mm) long samples of waterstops and construction joint
devices.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation
procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
G.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
D.
For slabs required to include moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA), do not proceed with
placement unless manufacturer's representative is present for every day of placement.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive
special treatment or finish as result of formwork.
1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.
B.
Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up
exposed to view for duration of concrete work.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Slabs with Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Provide warranty to cover the cost of
flooring failures due to moisture migration from slabs for ten years.
1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, placement of topical moisture
remediation system, and replacement of flooring with comparable flooring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
FORMWORK
A.
Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that
will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.
B.
Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
application of coatings.
2. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of
concrete surface.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.
1. Form: Flat Sheets.
2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.
C.
Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm).
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for
placement within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of weathering surfaces.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.
C.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.
D.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
E.
Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.
F.
Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.
G.
Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into
concrete and complying with ASTM C979.
1. Concentration: Base dosage rates on weight of Portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, and
other cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand.
2. Packaging: If pigments are to be added to mix at site, furnish pigments in premeasured
disintegrating bags to minimize job site waste.
3. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
4. Products:
a. BRICKFORM; BRICKFORM Liquid Integral Color: www.brickform.com.
b. Butterfield Color: www.butterfieldcolor.com.
c. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com.
d. Lambert Corporation: www.lambertusa.com.
e. L.M. Scofield Company; CHROMIX® Admixtures for Color-Conditioned® Concrete:
www.scofield.com.
f.
Solomon Colors; Solomon ColorFlo Liquid Colors: www.solomoncolors.com.
g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
H.
Waterproofing Additive: Crystalline waterproofing intended for mixing into concrete to close
concrete pores by growth of crystals, with no decrease in concrete strength or chemical
resistance.
1. Permeability of Cured Concrete: No measurable leakage when tested in accordance with
COE CRD-C 48 at 350 feet (106 m) of head; provide test reports.
I.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
J.
Fiber Reinforcement: Alkali-resistant polypropylene complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M.
1. Fiber Length: 0.25 inch (6 mm), nominal.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A.
Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
B.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
C.
High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.
D.
High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.
E.
Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E.
F.
Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D.
G.
Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C.
H.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B.
I.
Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.
J.
Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): Liquid, inorganic admixture free of volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) and formulated to close capillary systems formed during curing to
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
reduce moisture vapor emission and transmission, with no adverse effect on concrete
properties.
1. Provide admixture in all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.
2. Show that concrete properties are not adversely affected by testing in accordance with
ASTM C494/C494M and submitting independent agency test reports.
3. Show successful initial and long-term application of adhered flooring by submitting details
of ten (10) completed projects along with owner and contractor contact information for
verification by Architect.
4. Admixture manufacturer shall provide a warranty guaranteeing to remove and replace
failed flooring and apply a moisture vapor barrier coating over failed slabs; term of warranty
shall be for the lifetime of the concrete construction from the date at which installation of
flooring is approved by admixture manufacturer.
5. Contractor shall submit certification that he has received, understands, and will comply
with admixture manufacturer's prerequisites for issuance of manufacturer's warranty;
failure to comply with admixture manufacturer's prerequisites will result in assignment of
warranty remedy costs to Contractor.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced
polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as
suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of
single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A.
Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,
Type II.
1. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com.
b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572.
1. Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings.
C.
Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion
during placement.
1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
D.
Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable
top section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: Closed-cell, non-absorbent, compressible polyethylene or polymer foam in sheet
form.
2. Products:
a. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Foam Joint Filler with pre-scored top strip:
www.wrmeadows.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,
with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches
(150 mm) on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.
F.
Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 9005.
2.07 CURING MATERIALS
A.
Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming
compound; complying with ASTM C309.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
B.
03 3000-6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
Provide product containing fugitive red dye.
Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecRez: www.specchemllc.com.
b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; 1100-Clear: www.wrmeadows.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B.
Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.
C.
Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
D.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended or required by manufacturer.
E.
Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard (0.89 kg per cubic meter),
or as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions.
F.
Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:
4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa).
2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
3. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches (75 mm).
2.09 MIXING
A.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B.
Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C.
Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
D.
Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
E.
In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
F.
Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints
minimum 6 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with
manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair
damaged vapor retarder before covering.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
coverage required for protection.
B.
Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
directions. Splice laps with tie wire.
C.
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C.
Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint
devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
E.
Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where
construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing
laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure
water jetting.
F.
Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A.
Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C.
Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total
height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including
columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.
D.
Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours
after placing; use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade and cut at least 1 inch (25 mm) deep but not less
than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.
E.
Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key
form, with removable top section for joint sealant.
3.06 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A.
Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious
material. Broom and vacuum clean.
B.
Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.
C.
Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Apply sand and cement slurry coat on base course, immediately prior to placing toppings.
E.
Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.
F.
Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000.
3.07 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).
2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).
3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).
B.
Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
03 3000-8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas
requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B.
Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
more in height.
C.
Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6
mm) or more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,
not more than 24 hours after form removal.
3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
D.
Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.
Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated
sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000.
B.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd (76 cu m) or less of each class of
concrete placed.
E.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
F.
Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
G.
Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture
(MVRA) to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty
requirements.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3000-9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
???? 2014
C.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction
of Architect for each individual area.
3.12 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3511-1
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETE
???? 2014
SECTION 03 3511
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. Polished Concrete.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,
troweling, and similar operations; curing.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information
on compatibility of different products and limitations.
C.
Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
For polished concrete, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist
during application, with coatings applied.
B.
Mock-Up Size: 10 feet (3 m) square.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet (2.5 m) above the floor
surface over each 20 foot (6 m) square area of floor being finished.
B.
Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.
C.
Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.
B.
Liquid Densifier/Hardener:
C.
Polished Finish:
2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS
A.
Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with concrete, filling the
pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete prior to set.
1. Composition: Lithium silicate.
2. Products:
a. L.M. Scofield Company; SCOFIELD® Formula One™ Lithium Densifier MP:
www.scofield.com.
b. Edwards Concrete Company; Transcrete.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3511-2
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETE
???? 2014
2.03 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEM
A.
Polished Concrete System: Materials, equipment, and procedures designed and furnished by a
single manufacturer to produce dense polished concrete of the specified sheen.
1. Acceptable Systems:
a. Edwards Concrete Company; Transcrete system. (407) 656-2139.
b. Substitutions: Not permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B.
Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.02 GENERAL
A.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 CONCRETE POLISHING
A.
Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, using
manufacturer approved installer.
1. Satin Finish: Reflecting images from side lighting.
B.
Protect finished surface as required and recommended by manufacturer of polishing system.
C.
Recommended installation of Ram Board or equal to protect floor surface. Do not cover with
plastic sheeting.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3511.14-1
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULA
???? 2014
SECTION 03 3511.14
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,
troweling, and similar operations; curing.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information
on compatibility of different products and limitations.
C.
Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet (2.5 m) above the floor
surface over each 20 foot (6 m) square area of floor being finished.
B.
Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.
C.
Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.
2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS
A.
Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Ashford Formula-Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with
concrete, filling the pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete prior to set.
1. Composition: proprietary to Curecrete.
2. Products:
a. Curecrete Distribution, Inc.
1) 1203 W. Spring Creek Place, Springville, UT 84663-0551; Telephone (800)
998-5664
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B.
Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.02 GENERAL
A.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
03 3511.14-2
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULA
???? 2014
3.03 COATING APPLICATION
A.
Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,
laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, and
other impediments to adhesion.
B.
Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limits
established by coating manufacturer.
C.
Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove
excess material.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A.
New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm
enough to work on after troweling.
B.
New Colored Concrete: Delay application a minimum of 30 days after troweling.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, using
manufacturer approved installer.
B.
Protect finished surface as required and recommended for 3 months until chemical reaction
process is complete.
1. Do not allow traffic on floors for 3 hours after application.
a. Do not allow vehicle parking on concrete slab.
b. Temporary vehicle parking, only if slab protected by drop cloths.
c. Do not allow pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.
d. Do not allow any steel members on slab.
e. Clean/remove spills immediately, spot treat stains with degreaser or oil emulsifier.
f.
Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-1
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Concrete Brick.
C.
Clay Facing Brick.
D.
Common Brick.
E.
Hollow Brick.
F.
Mortar and Grout.
G.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
H.
Flashings.
I.
Lintels.
J.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
B.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
C.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces.
D.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
C.
ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
D.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
E.
ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
F.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.
G.
ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a.
H.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
I.
ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.
J.
ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2011.
K.
ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2013.
L.
ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2013.
M. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
N.
ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-2
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
O.
ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.
P.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
Q.
ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006
(Reapproved 2011).
R.
ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2013.
S.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
T.
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
U.
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
V.
ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale); 2013.
W. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2010.
X.
ASTM C1634 - Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick; 2011.
Y.
ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry; 2011.
Z.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting two weeks before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and
masonry accessories.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet (2.4 m) long by 6 feet (1.8 m) high;
include mortar and accessories and structural backup in mock-up.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches (400 x 200 mm) and
nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm).
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
B.
04 2000-3
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
Concrete Brick:
1. For architectural and paver use, ASTM C1634 (or ASTM C55-03 Grade N), non-cored
(solid), normal weight.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2.02 BRICK UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. As indicated on the Drawings
a. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B.
Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units
can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.
C.
Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units.
1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
D.
Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V.
1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
E.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F.
Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Water: Clean and potable.
H.
Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
I.
Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill
galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-4
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
(3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure.
D.
Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; ASTM
A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/153M, Class B;
0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to
provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage
on each exposure.
E.
Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and
building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13
mm) of mortar coverage from masonry face.
1. Concrete frame: Dovetail anchors of bent steel strap, nominal 1 inch (25 mm) width x
0.024 in (0.61 mm) thick, with trapezoidal wire ties 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
F.
Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) thick, adjustable, eye and pintle
type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch
(25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow
vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in (32 mm).
G.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry
veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick, designed for fastening to
structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that
penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage.
2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick.
3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm).
2.05 FLASHINGS
A.
Copper/Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: 3 oz/sq ft (0.915 kg/sq m) copper sheet coated with
elastic asphalt compound.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; H & B C-Coat Flashing: www.h-b.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Flashing Sealant/Adhesive: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;
1/2 inch (____ mm) wide x by maximum lengths available.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
b. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of
wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and
allow proper cavity drainage.
1. Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid mesh designed for installation at flashing locations.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Break: www.advancedflashing.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2)
3)
04 2000-5
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
Mortar Net Solutions; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier: www.mortarnet.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Weeps: plastic weep tubes, 3/8" O.D. with screens and wicks for all areas except grade level,
at grade level install open head joints..
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.
c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.
B.
Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
C.
Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse grout
for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm).
D.
Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E.
Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm).
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
D.
Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches (200 mm).
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-6
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
3.04 PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
F.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
H.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at ____ inches (16 mm) on center horizontally above
through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL
A.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B.
For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.
C.
Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended
by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
E.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space
anchors at maximum of ___ inches (16 mm) horizontally and 16 inches (400 mm) vertically.
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches (200 mm) on center.
B.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
C.
Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center
vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter
of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) on
center.
D.
Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry
veneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) on center
horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so
maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) on center.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-7
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRY
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
3.11 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - MULTIPLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRY
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
C.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Space
anchors at maximum of ___ inches (16 mm) horizontally and 16 inches (400 mm) vertically.
3.12 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches (100 mm) into
adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form watertight pan at
non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B.
Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry.
C.
Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches (152 mm) and seal watertight with mastic or elastic
sealant.
D.
Form end dams at flashing terminations.
3.13 LINTELS
A.
Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B.
Maintain minimum 8 inch (200 mm) bearing on each side of opening.
3.14 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance.
3.15 BUILT-IN WORK
A.
As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work
and furnished under other sections.
B.
Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
C.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13
mm/6 m) or more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in
two stories or more.
E.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6
mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m).
F.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m).
G.
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
04 2000-8
UNIT MASONRY
???? 2014
3.17 CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,
and location.
B.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.18 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
3.19 PROTECTION
A.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 1200-1
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
???? 2014
SECTION 05 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Structural steel framing members, support members, sag rods, and struts.
B.
Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
C.
Grouting under base plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing.
B.
Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.
C.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2011.
B.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
C.
AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004.
D.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
E.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
F.
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013.
G.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
H.
ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004
(Reapproved 2009).
I.
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
J.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
K.
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
L.
ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).
M. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
N.
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2013.
O.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
P.
IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments,
and fasteners.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
C.
05 1200-2
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
???? 2014
Connections not detailed.
Indicate cambers and loads.
Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B.
Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
architecturally exposed structural steel.
C.
Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years of experience.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).
E.
Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of
experience.
F.
Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
C.
Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant
structural steel.
D.
Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
E.
Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded.
F.
Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.
G.
Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.
H.
Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
I.
Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
J.
Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A
153M, Class C.
K.
Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and
capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi (48 MPa) at 28 days.
L.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
M. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B.
Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C.
Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
D.
Develop required camber for members.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 1200-3
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
???? 2014
2.03 FINISH
A.
Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A.
Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges".
B.
Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe
condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
C.
Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.
D.
Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise
specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".
E.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
G.
Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45
degrees.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 2100-1
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
???? 2014
SECTION 05 2100
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.
B.
Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.
C.
Supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Grouting base plates and bearing plates.
Superstructure framing.
B.
Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles.
C.
Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches (450 mm)
in decking.
D.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013.
C.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
D.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
E.
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
F.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
G.
IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.
H.
SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2011.
I.
SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist
Institute; 2008.
J.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
K.
SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type
I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004).
L.
SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings,
cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the
Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 2100-2
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
???? 2014
B.
Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with
SJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).
E.
Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Joists:
1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoists.ws
2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS (TO BE SELECTED BY PROJECT ENGINEER)
A.
Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C.
B.
Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
C.
Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
F.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed.
B.
Space stud shear connectors on top of top chords at ____ inches (24 mm) on center.
2.04 FINISH
A.
Galvanize joists as specified.
1. Galvanize steel ledge angles.
2. Leave other steel members unprimed.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.
C.
Galvanizing: Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m) galvanized coating to ASTM
A123/A123M requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 ERECTION
A.
Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.
B.
Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb,
and in true alignment.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 2100-3
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
???? 2014
C.
Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of
the work of this section.
D.
After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.
E.
Install supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).
F.
Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion
of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
G.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.
H.
After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not
shop primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 3100-1
STEEL DECKING
???? 2014
SECTION 05 3100
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Roof deck.
B.
Composite floor deck.
C.
Metal form deck.
D.
Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches (450 mm).
E.
Bearing plates and angles.
F.
Stud shear connectors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck.
C.
Section 04 2723 - Cavity Wall Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates
embedded in cavity wall masonry.
D.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches
(450 mm) and shear stud connectors.
E.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing plates in
cast-in-place concrete.
F.
Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches (450
mm) and shear stud connectors.
G.
Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing
plates and joist seats in cast-in-place concrete.
H.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angle concrete stops at deck edges.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2013.
C.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
D.
ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and
Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel; 2013.
E.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
F.
ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2013.
G.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
H.
AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008.
I.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
J.
IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.
K.
ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems; ICC Evaluation
Service, Inc.; 2010 (R2013).
L.
ICC-ES AC70 - Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete, Steel and
Masonry Elements; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2013.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 3100-2
STEEL DECKING
???? 2014
M. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks;
Steel Deck Institute; 2007.
N.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
O.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,
pertinent details, and accessories.
C.
Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and
finishes.
D.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum five years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B.
Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Deck:
1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws.
2. Cordeck, Inc: www.cordeck.com.
3. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STEEL DECK
A.
All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.
1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.
2. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360 of span.
3. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: 1/240 of span.
B.
Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) , with G90/Z275
galvanized coating.
a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage (0.8 mm).
3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).
4. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.
5. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch (600 mm).
6. Side Joints: Lock seam.
7. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
05 3100-3
STEEL DECKING
???? 2014
Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) , with G90/Z275
galvanized coating.
a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria.
2. Span Design: Double.
3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage (0.8 mm).
4. Nominal Height: 2 inches (51 mm).
5. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.
6. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch (600 mm).
7. Side Joints: Lock seam.
8. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, unfinished.
B.
Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.
C.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
D.
Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
E.
Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point.
Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.
1. Design Requirements: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the
applicable requirements of SDI design method for roof deck and floor deck applications
and ICC-ES AC43.
2. Material: Steel; ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1077.
3. Products:
a. Simpson Strong-Tie; XQ114S1224: www.strongtie.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
F.
Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.
1. Design Requirements for Sidelap Connections: Provide number and type of fasteners that
comply with the applicable requirements of SDI design method for roof deck and floor deck
applications and ICC-ES AC43.
2. Fasteners for Steel Roof Decks Protected with Waterproofing Membrane: ASTM B 633,
SC1, Type III zinc electroplate.
3. Products:
a. ITW Commercial Construction North America; ITW CCNA-Buildex Teks Select
Series; ________: www.ITWBuildex.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch (19 mm) outside diameter, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
H.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch (25 mm) thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A.
Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22
gage (0.8 mm) thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
B.
Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage (1.8 mm thick) sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches (75 mm) wide, sealed
watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 3100-4
STEEL DECKING
???? 2014
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align
and level.
B.
On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch (100 mm) bearing.
C.
On steel supports provide minimum 3 inch (75 mm) bearing.
D.
Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches (300
mm) on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using
methods specified.
1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
E.
Clinch lock seam side laps.
F.
At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches (600 mm) on center
maximum.
G.
Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively
engage adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.
H.
At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches (450 mm) on center maximum.
I.
Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.
J.
At deck openings from 6 inches (150 mm) to 18 inches (450 mm) in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4
inch (50 x 50 x 6 mm) steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend
minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.
K.
Where deck (other than cellular deck electrical raceway) changes direction, install 6 inch (150
mm) minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12
inches (300 mm) on center maximum.
L.
At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete.
Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.
M. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and
angle flashings to close openings.
N.
Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam
cell closures.
O.
Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck
flute.
P.
Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.
Q.
Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 4000-1
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
???? 2014
SECTION 05 4000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing.
B.
Exterior wall sheathing.
C.
Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
D.
Delegated Design Requirements
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.
B.
Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Stone veneer supported by wall stud metal framing.
C.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.
D.
Section 06 1000: Wall sheathing.
E.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.
F.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier over sheathing.
G.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
H.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud
framing.
I.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
D.
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products
and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.
E.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
F.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
G.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing
system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and
firestopping.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,
welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.
1. Indicate stud layout.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
D.
05 4000-2
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
???? 2014
Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections.
Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring
special attention .
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of exterior framed wall, including components specified elsewhere, such as
insulation, sheathing, window frame, door frame, exterior wall finish, and interior wall finish.
B.
Location: As directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Framing:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; _______: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Marino; _______: www.marinoware.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Framing Connectors and Accessories:
1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A.
Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B.
Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:
1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members
according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified
design loads for project conditions within required limits.
3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.
4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Floors: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/480 of span.
b. Roofs: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/240 of span.
c. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/240 of span.
d. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in (13 mm)
vertical deflection.
5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic
day/night temperature ranges.
6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,
and clearances of intended openings.
2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
B.
05 4000-3
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
???? 2014
Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels.
Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.
1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped
galvanized coating for thicknesses less than 10 gage (0.118 inch) (3 mm), and factory
punched holes and slots.
2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable
code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design
of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
3. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate
movement using slotted holes, shouldered screws or screws and anti-friction or stepped
bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement
connections where indicated on drawings.
a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner
allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for
minimum movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to
structure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without
affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
c. Provide top track with long leg track and head of wall movement connectors;
minimum track length of 12 feet (3660 mm).
4. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation,
floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.
2.04 WALL SHEATHING
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions
encountered; finish to match framing components.
B.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
2.06 FASTENERS
A.
Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A153/A153M.
B.
Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.
C.
Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007
requirements.
B.
Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum
24 inches (600 mm) on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C.
Place studs at 16 inches (400 mm) on center; not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from abutting
walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
D.
Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door
and window jambs.
E.
Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design
requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 4000-4
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
???? 2014
F.
Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
G.
Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
H.
Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load
bearing framing.
I.
Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent
stud rotation.
J.
Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.02 WALL SHEATHING
A.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.
1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5000-1
METAL FABRICATIONS
???? 2014
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.
B.
Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
C.
Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs.
D.
Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
E.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
C.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
D.
ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.
E.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
F.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
G.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
H.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
I.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2013.
J.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
K.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
L.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
M. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
N.
ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength; 2013.
O.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
P.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
Q.
ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless
Tubes; 2012.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5000-2
METAL FABRICATIONS
???? 2014
R.
ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless
Tubes (Metric); 2012.
S.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
T.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
U.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
V.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
W. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; American Welding Society; 2008.
X.
IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.
Y.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
Z.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
AA. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Design ladders under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in
design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C.
Plates: ASTM A283.
D.
Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
E.
Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33.
F.
Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
G.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
H.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
I.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
J.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5000-3
METAL FABRICATIONS
???? 2014
2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B.
Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.
C.
Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.
E.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime
paint finish.
1. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches (9 x 50 mm) members spaced at 20 inches (500 mm).
2. Rungs: one inch (25 mm) diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches (300 mm) on center.
3. Space rungs 7 inches (175 mm) from wall surface.
B.
Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.
C.
Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
D.
Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For
support of metal decking; prime paint finish.
E.
Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.
F.
Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint
finish.
G.
Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.
H.
Toilet Partition Suspension Members: Steel channel sections; prime paint finish.
I.
Reel Bank Supports: As shown on the drawings or required by Owner's fluid vendor.
1. General: Supports shall be designed to allow for mounting of reel banks at least 14 feet
above finished floor and shall be designed to prevent lateral movement which occurs as
hoses are pulled from reels.
2.05 PREFABRICATED LADDERS
A.
Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to
greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible.
1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms
and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this
section.
2. Materials: Carbon steel; ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 36 minimum.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard hot-dipped galvanizing; comply with ASTM A153/A153M.
2.06 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be embedded in
masonry.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
05 5000-4
METAL FABRICATIONS
???? 2014
Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is
required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C.
Prepare surfaces exposed to public areas in accordance witth SSPC-SP5.
D.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
E.
Prime Painting: One coat.
F.
Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
G.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
2.07 FINISHES - ALUMINUM
A.
Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
B.
Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
C.
Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.
2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated .
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5100-1
METAL STAIRS
???? 2014
SECTION 05 5100
METAL STAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Stairs with concrete treads.
B.
Structural steel stair framing and supports.
C.
Handrails and guards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete fill in stair pans ; mesh reinforcement for
landings.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete.
C.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
D.
Section 04 2731 - Reinforced Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
E.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications.
F.
Section 05 5000: Bearing plates for metal stairs, including anchorage.
G.
Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood handrails.
H.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2012.
C.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
D.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
E.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
F.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
G.
ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
H.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2013.
I.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
J.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
K.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
L.
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
M. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5100-2
METAL STAIRS
???? 2014
N.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2013.
O.
ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2013.
P.
ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
Q.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
R.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
S.
NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers; 1992, Fifth Edition.
T.
NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers; 2009.
U.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
V.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
W. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.
C.
Welders' Certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of
this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct
supervision of such an engineer.
B.
Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL
A.
Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical
and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other
and to building structure.
1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent
requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract
documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.
2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the
applicable local code.
3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for
transport and access to site.
5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch.
6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5100-3
METAL STAIRS
???? 2014
B.
Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels:
1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or
mechanical; underside of stair not covered by soffit IS considered exposed to view.
a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded
smooth and flush.
b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush.
c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline.
d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts.
e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius.
f.
Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte
finish.
C.
Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with
design and specified quality level.
D.
Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except
where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.
2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS
A.
Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above.
B.
Risers: Closed.
C.
Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill.
1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), minimum.
2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet.
3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) minimum.
4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Welded to carrier angles welded to stringers.
5. Concrete Reinforcement: None.
6. Concrete Finish: For resilient floor covering.
D.
Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans.
1. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius.
2. Riser/Nosing Profile: Vertical riser with underside of nosing sloped up from bottom of
tread pan at not less than 60 degrees from horizontal, with rounded top of nosing of
minimum radius.
3. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) overhang.
4. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) wide.
E.
Stringers: Rolled steel channels.
1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches (250 mm).
2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.
F.
Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve
design load capacity.
G.
Railings: Steel pipe railings.
H.
Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted.
I.
Under Side of Stair: Exposed to view, to be finished same as specified for other exposed to
view surfaces.
2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS
A.
Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), maximum.
B.
Guards:
1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.
a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (31 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm),
maximum.
2. Infill at Picket Railings: Vertical pickets.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
4.
05 5100-4
METAL STAIRS
???? 2014
a. Horizontal Spacing: Maximum 4 inches (100 mm) on center.
b. Material: Solid steel bar.
c. Shape: Square.
d. Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm) square.
e. Top Mounting: Welded to underside of top rail.
f.
Bottom Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.
Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair.
a. Outside Diameter: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Material: Steel pipe or tube, round.
c. Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches (100 mm) on center.
d. Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush.
End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails.
a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings.
b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.
2.04 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501 structural tubing, round and shapes as
indicated.
C.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
D.
Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will
be exposed to view.
1. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel).
2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel).
E.
Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 psi (20 MPa) 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch (50 to 75
mm) slump.
F.
Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
G.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
H.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.05 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C.
Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer.
1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
2. Number of Coats: One.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting
templates.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
05 5100-5
METAL STAIRS
???? 2014
C.
Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
D.
Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations
specified for jointing quality levels.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
C.
Maximum Gap wall to Stringer. 1/4 inch. (If gap is larger contractor will correct by welding a
continuous 3/16 inch stell plate to top of stringer. Corrective work will be the contractors sole
expense.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 1000-1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
B.
Sheathing.
C.
Roof-mounted curbs.
D.
Roofing nailers.
E.
Roofing cant strips.
F.
Preservative treated wood materials.
G.
Fire retardant treated wood materials.
H.
Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
I.
Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
J.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for
wood framing.
B.
Section 06 0573 - Wood Treatment: Field-applied termiticide and mildicide for wood.
C.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing.
D.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
E.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
F.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
APA PRP-108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels
(Form E445); 2001.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing; 2013.
D.
ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated
Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.
E.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
F.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
G.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2012.
H.
ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc;
2013.
I.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
J.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Department of Commerce; 2010.
K.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 1000-2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application
instructions.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).
B.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Wall Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as
follows:
1. Span Rating: 24/0 (610/0).
2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-C, Exterior Exposure.
1. Plywood sheathing with Fluid Applied Air Barrier and Dampproofing
a. 5/8 inch plywood in non-hurricane areas
b. 3/4 inch plywood in hurricane areas or where a NOA is required for the exterior wall
construction.
C.
Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch
Type X fire-resistant (16 mm Type X fire-resistant).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
D.
06 1000-3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of
450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times
thickness of sheathing.
3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
B.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B.
Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated
and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion
when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated
weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Treat all exterior rough carpentry items.
c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.
3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low
temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;
capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an
additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.
c. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .
d. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may
become wet.
C.
Preservative Treatment:
1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu
m) retention.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
d. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade.
e. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 1000-4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B.
In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C.
In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
E.
Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above
ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
F.
Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Handrails.
4. Grab bars.
5. Towel and bath accessories.
6. Wall-mounted door stops.
7. Chalkboards and marker boards.
8. Wall paneling and trim.
9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A.
Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B.
Provide wood curb at all roof openings except _____ where specifically indicated otherwise.
Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96
inches (2440 mm), measured horizontally.
2. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
B.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all
edges and into studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
06 1000-5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
Install adjacent boards without gaps.
Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.
B.
Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch
in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A.
Wall or ceiling sheathing for Composite Metal Panel (ACM/CMP) or Portland Cement Plastering
(stucco):
1. APA Structural Panel Rated sheathing
2. Exterior Exposure Class
3. Span Rating: 24/0.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch or 3/4 inch in hurricane and or NOA required for building exterior.
5. Fire Retardant Treatment: REQUIRED
B.
Parapet Wall Sheathing for single ply roof membrane (PVC/TPO):
1. Acceptable products:
a. G-P Gypsum corporation; 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board and 5/8 inch DensDeck
Type X Roof Board.
b. 3/4 inch in Hurricane/NOA jurisdiction.
2. Composition: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum panel with water-resistant core.
3. Size: Nominal 4 feet x 8 feet, 4 feet x 4 feet; square edge.
4. Thickness:
a. 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board at framing 16 inches on center.
b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Roof Board (Type X) at framing 24 inches on center.
5. Fire Resistance:
a. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.
b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Type X Roof Board; UL-classified Type DD when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 119.
c. Code alternate to 15 minute thermal barrier as tested in accordance with UL 1256.
C.
Parapet Wall sheathing at modified bitumen roof:
1. Acceptable products:
a. G-P Gypsum corporation; 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board and 5/8 inch DensDeck
Type X Roof Board.
2. Composition: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum panel with highly filled propretary
heat cured coating on one side.
3. Size: nominal 4 feet x 8 feet; edges; square
4. Thickness:
a. 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board at framing 16 inches on center.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
5.
6.
7.
06 1000-6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
???? 2014
b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Roof Board (Type X) at framing 24 inches on center.
Fire Resistance:
a. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.
b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Type X Roof Board; UL-classified Type DD when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 119.
c. Code alternate to 15 minute thermal barrier as tested in accordance with UL 1256.
EIFS sheathing: Glass Mat Faced Gypsum, ASTM C1177/C 1177M, water resistant core,
square long edges. 1/2 inch thick except 5/8 inch thick in hurricane or NOA zones.
Wall Sheathing with attached signage:
a. APA Structural Panel Rated sheathing
b. Exterior Exposure Class
c. Span Rating: 24/0.
d. Thickness: 5/8 inch or 3/4 inch in hurricane and or NOA required for building exterior.
e. Fire Retardant Treatment: REQUIRED
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 4100-1
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Factory finishing.
E.
Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for casework.
C.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of cabinet exterior.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;
2009.
B.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
E.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood
Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).
F.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2005.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than two weeks before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8).
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
3. Include certification program label.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
B.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
4.
5.
6.
06 4100-2
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and
products meet the specified requirements.
Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware,
finishes, and plumbing accessories.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect units from moisture damage.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
B.
Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Premium grade.
C.
Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Hardwood Edgebanding: Use solid hardwood edgebanding matching species, color, grain, and
grade for exposed portions of cabinetry.
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.
3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
4. Manufacturer listed on draiwings for a specific use. .
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
C.
Provide specific types as scheduled.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors
as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as
scheduled, finish as scheduled.
3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) nominal thickness, through
color, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
4. Flame Retardant Surfaces: HGF, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color,
colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as
scheduled, finish as scheduled.
6. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, undecorated; for
application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 4100-3
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
2.04 COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Custom quality .
B.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate sheet, unless otherwise indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal
thickness
a. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating 5 to 20.
b. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings
c. Manufacturers:
1) Formica corporation; www.formica.com
2) Lamin Art, Inc: www.laminart.com.
3) WilsonArt International, Inc.: www.wilsonart.com.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements
2. Exposed edge treament: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch clad with HPDL
to mach surface.
3. Back and End Splashes: Match Surface Color, Pattern and Substrate.
C.
Solid Surface Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous
substrate.
1. Flat sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, mimimum.
2. Solid Surfacing sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Comply with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3 ;
acrylic or polyester resin, minieral filler, and pigments; homogenous, not-porous and
capale or being worked and repaired with standard wood working tools no surface coating;
color and pattern consisten throughout thickness.
a. Surface Burning characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; test in accordance with ASTM E 84.
b. NSP approved for food contact.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss ratio of 5 to 20.
d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Dupont: www.corian.com
2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com
3) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com
4) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com
5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.
D.
Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible
with inconspicuous adhesive joints.
1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is
acceptable.
2. Color: As indicated on drawings.
3. Stone Thickness: 1/2 inch minimum.
4. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare.
5. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square profile stone, 1 inch thick with 3/16 inch radius corner.
6. Back and End Splashes: Match counterop.
E.
Stainless Steel countertops: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inch
nominal sheet thickness.
1. Finish: 4B, satin brushed finish.
2. Exposed edge shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch high face, 1/2 inch return
to face of case, reinforced with hardwood or steel.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same as top; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop;
square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turn-down.
4. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch high by 1 inch thick, unless noted otherwise.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
F.
06 4100-4
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic
resin over continous substrate.
1. Flat Sheet thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum
2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: complying with
homogeous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard
woodworking tools; no surface coating, color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Factory fabricate componenets to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes
indicated; comply with tthe MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.
b. Sinks: Separate units for undercounter mounting; minimum 3/4 inch wall thickness;
comply iwth ANMSI Z124.3.
c. Finish on Exposed surfaces: Polished.
d. Color and Patern: As indicated on the drawings.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Dupont Zodiaq
2) Silestone
3) Cambria
4) CasesarStone
5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B.
Glass: Type A as specified in Section 08 8000.
C.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized
or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in
exposed locations.
E.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F.
Grommets: Standard painted metal grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.
G.
Countertop Supports: Standard back mounted system using surface mounted metal countertop
supports, satin chrome finish. Manufacturers standard system for provide full support of
countertops.
2.06 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf
standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch
(25 mm) spacing adjustments.
C.
Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers ("U"
shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 100 mm centers).
D.
Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.
E.
Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Extension types as scheduled.
2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
6. Products:
a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.
b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.
c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.
d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
e.
06 4100-5
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
F.
Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.
1. Products:
a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.
b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com.
c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.
d. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Upper and lower track of satin anodized aluminum, with
matching shoe equipped with nylon rollers.
2.07 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material.
B.
Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
2.08 FABRICATION
A.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B.
Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
C.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs.
E.
Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as
follows:
1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation.
2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation.
3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.
F.
Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at
16 inches (400 mm) on center.
G.
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal
cut edges.
H.
Shop glaze glass materials using the Interior Dry method specified in Section 08 8000.
2.09 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.
C.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
D.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5
- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 2, Lacquer, Precatalyzed.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
06 4100-6
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm).
Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E.
Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species
to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
G.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest section practicable with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Prepare all cutouts accurateely to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
3. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
H.
Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches unless indicated otherwise.
I.
Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches longin one peice; join pieces with adhesive
sealant in accordance wit hmanufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
J.
Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and back
and end splashes; accurately fit mechanical field joints in lengths over 144 inches are
permitted.
1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.
2. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turn downs.
3. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire
bottom (hidden) surface.
4. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where
indicated on drawings.
K.
Wall Mounted Counters. Provide matching skirts, aprons, brackets and braces as indicated on
the drawings or required to support.
L.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Install flat surfaces level,
shim where required.
1. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum 5/8 inch penetration into
substrate.
2. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.
3. Attach epoxy resin countertops using compatible adhesive.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; maximum
B.
Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C.
Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust installed work.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
06 4100-7
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
???? 2014
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
B.
Protect installed products until ocmpletion of project.
C.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULES
A.
Cabinet Style: Flush Overlay.
B.
Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush Style
C.
Drawer Construction: Dove Tail
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 1400-1
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
???? 2014
SECTION 07 1400
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.
B.
Cant strips and other accessories.
C.
Drainage panels and Protection boards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet covers, copings, and
counterflashings.
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints in substrates.
D.
Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drain and plumbing vent flashing flanges.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of a Liquid-Applied
Waterproofing Membrane; 2008.
B.
ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic ElastomersTension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).
C.
ASTM D471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids; 2012.
D.
ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).
E.
ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005
(Reapproved 2010).
F.
ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable
Adhesion Testers; 2009.
G.
ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing
Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2006).
H.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
I.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; Fifth Edition, with interim
updates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for membrane.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with
other materials.
D.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-applied
waterproofing membranes with ten years experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid-applied waterproofing with
minimum three years experience.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
07 1400-2
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
???? 2014
Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up consisting of 100 sq ft (10 sq m) of horizontal waterproofed
panel, including internal and external corners similar to those that will be present in the finished
work.
1. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) for 24 hours before and
during application and until cured.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to Owner.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water ,
except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of
concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Manufacturers:
1. American Hydrotech, Inc: www.hydrotechusa.com.
2. Barrett Company: www.barrettroofs.com.
3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc: www.carlisle-ccw.com.
4. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Use at locations indicated on the drawings..
1. Cover with protection board.
2.03 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Elasticized rubberized asphaltic compound,
hot-applied and quick setting.
1. Cured Thickness: 0.03 inches (0.75 mm), minimum.
2. Suitable for installation over concrete, gypsum board, and plywood substrates.
3. Tensile Strength: 15 psi (0.103 MPa), measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
4. Ultimate Elongation: 500 percent, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
5. Hardness: 60, measured in accordance with ASTM D2240, using Type A durometer.
6. Tear Strength: 150 lbf/inch (26.3 N/mm), measured in accordance with ASTM D624.
7. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.2 perms (1.25 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, measured in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
8. Adhesion: Greater than 150 psi (1.03 MPa), measured in accordance with ASTM D4541.
9. Products:
a. Same as membrane manufacturer..
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Surface Conditioner: compatible type, compatible with membrane compound; as recommended
by membrane manufacturer.
B.
Protection Board: Type capable of preventing damage to waterproofing due to backfilling and
construction traffic.
1. Use one of the following:
a. Semi-rigid glass fiber board; unaffected by water, freeze-thaw, fungus, or soil
bacteria; containing no formaldehyde, phenol, acrylic, or artificial color; 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick, nominal.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 1400-3
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
???? 2014
C.
Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich .
D.
Cant Strips: Premolded composition material .
E.
Counterflashings: As recommended by membrane and protection board manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits,
projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
waterproofing system.
C.
Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to
full contact bond of waterproofing materials.
D.
Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.
C.
Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D.
Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
E.
Install cant strips at inside corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum
thickness.
B.
Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect
conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
C.
Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install
counterflashing over all exposed edges.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD
A.
Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with tack-reducing surfacing at rate of approximately
10 lbs/100 sq ft (4 kg/10 sq m).
B.
Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
C.
Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards
around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood
testing.
B.
Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.
C.
If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as
directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.
D.
When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 1616-1
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
???? 2014
SECTION 07 1616
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Crystalline waterproofing.
B.
Preparation of surfaces to be waterproofed, including plugging active water leaks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete work to be waterproofed.
B.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry work to be waterproofed.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Test data showing hydraulic permeability.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
5. Details for waterproofing at joints, intersections, and other special conditions.
C.
Specimen warranty.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of products of the type
specified and providing technical representatives to visit project site.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, with documented experience on at least 5
projects of similar nature within the last 5 years.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Take necessary precautions to keep cementitious materials dry.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide installer's warranty agreeing to correct leaking waterproofing for 2 years from the Date
of Substantial Completion, unless leakage is caused by structural failure, movement of the
structure, or other causes beyond the installer's control.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Crystalline Waterproofing:
1. Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com
2. Gemite Products Inc: www.gemite.com.
3. Vandex: www.vandex-usa.com.
4. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CEM-KOTE CW PLUS: www.wrmeadows.com.
5. Xypex Chemical Corporation: www.xypex.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
6.
07 1616-2
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
???? 2014
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.
Waterproofing for building surfaces:
1. Inside of elevator pits.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Crystalline Waterproofing: Portland cement and chemical compound that when applied to the
surface of concrete forms insoluble crystals in the capillary pores preventing the passage of
liquids, while having no adverse effect on the normal properties of concrete.
1. Hydraulic Permeability: No measurable leakage or water flow at 200 psi (1.38 MPa)
pressure when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 48, using minimum 2 inch (50 mm)
thick sample and 20 days duration.
2. Toxicity: Non-toxic.
3. Color: Gray.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions. Use sand blasting, water blasting, or acid
etching as recommended.
C.
Plug water leaks.
D.
Patch holes, construction joints, and cracks. Remove defective concrete.
E.
Obtain approval of manufacturer's field representative before beginning installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain environmental conditions
required and recommended by manufacturer. Keep a copy of manufacturer's instructions on
site.
B.
Coordinate installation with installation of products that must penetrate waterproofed surfaces.
C.
Prevent excessive drying of surface.
1. Cure waterproofing for at least 3 days, or length of time required by manufacturer, with
water spray and adequate air circulation.
2. Do not use chemical curing agents unless explicitly approved by waterproofing
manufacturer.
D.
Do not backfill, fill water or liquid holding structures, or apply finish coatings until time period
recommended by manufacturer has passed.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect from damage by weather. Do not cover with impermeable (plastic) sheeting unless air
circulation is provided.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged waterproofing after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2100-1
THERMAL INSULATION
???? 2014
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation
wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, over roof sheathing, and exterior wall behind
________ wall finish.
B.
Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Field-applied termiticide for concrete slabs and
foundations.
B.
Section 04 2723 - Cavity Wall Unit Masonry: Masonry walls enclosing insulation.
C.
Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing.
D.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
E.
Section 07 2400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Board insulation on exterior side of
walls, finished with weatherproof coating.
F.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
G.
Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing
system.
H.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.
I.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.
B.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2014.
C.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
D.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2014.
E.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
F.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
G.
ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2012.
H.
NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions
required for installation and installation techniques.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2100-2
THERMAL INSULATION
???? 2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene board.
B.
Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene board.
C.
Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder. (Vapor retarder
to be installed only if shown on the drawings.)
D.
Insulation Above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. (Only if
shown on the drawings.)
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XII; extruded polystyrene
board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Board Size: 24 x 96 inch (610 x 2440 mm).
5. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm).
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 4.6 per 1 inch (25.4 mm) at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C)
mean temperature.
8. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi (104 kPa).
9. Board Density: 1.20 lb/cu ft (19 kg/cu m).
10. Water Absorption: 0.3 percent by volume, maximum.
11. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
c. Pactiv Building Products: greenguard.pactiv.com.
12. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option.
B.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance and Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
6. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
B.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2100-3
THERMAL INSULATION
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A.
Install boards horizontally on walls.
B.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS
A.
Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.
B.
Install boards horizontally on walls.
C.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS (IF REQUIRED BY THE JURISDICTION)
A.
Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
B.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C.
Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing
slab.
3.05 BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
F.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
G.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
H.
Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07 2500.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
TABLE 301.1 (IECC) and Table N1101.2 (IRC)
CLIMATE ZONES, MOISTURE REGIMES, AND WARM-HUMID DESIGNATIONS BY STATE, COUNTY, AND
TERRITORY
Key:
A – Moist, B – Dry, C – Marine. Absence of moisture designation indicates moisture
regime is irrelevant.
Asterisk ‘*’ indicates a Warm-Humid location.
US STATES
ALABAMA
3A Autauga*
2A Baldwin*
3A Barbour*
3A Bibb
3A Blount
3A Bullock*
3A Butler*
3A Calhoun
3A Chambers
3A Cherokee
3A Chilton
3A Choctaw*
3A Clarke*
3A Clay
3A Cleburne
3A Coffee*
3A Colbert
3A Conecuh*
3A Coosa
3A Covington*
3A Crenshaw*
3A Cullman
3A Dale*
3A Dallas*
3A DeKalb
3A Elmore*
3A Escambia*
3A Etowah
3A Fayette
3A Franklin
3A Geneva*
3A Greene
3A Hale
3A Henry*
3A Houston*
3A Jackson
3A Jefferson
3A Lamar
3A Lauderdale
3A Lawrence
3A Lee
3A Limestone
3A Lowndes*
3A Macon*
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Madison
Marengo*
Marion
Marshall
Mobile*
Monroe*
Montgomery*
Morgan
Perry*
Pickens
Pike*
Randolph
Russell*
Shelby
St. Clair
Sumter
Talladega
Tallapoosa
Tuscaloosa
Walker
Washington*
Wilcox*
Winston
ALASKA
7 Aleutians
East
7 Aleutians
West
7 Anchorage
8 Bethel
7 Bristol Bay
7 Denali
8 Dillingham
8 Fairbanks
North Star
7 Haines
7 Juneau
7 Kenai
Peninsula
7 Ketchikan
Gateway
7 Kodiak Island
7 Lake and
Peninsula
7 MatanuskaSusitna
8
8
8
7
7
7
8
7
8
7
7
8
Nome
North Slope
Northwest
Arctic
Prince of
Wales-Outer
Ketchikan
Sitka
SkagwayHoonah-Angoon
Southeast
Fairbanks
Valdez-Cordova
Wade Hampton
WrangellPetersburg
Yakutat
Yukon-Koyukuk
ARIZONA
5B Apache
3B Cochise
5B Coconino
4B Gila
3B Graham
3B Greenlee
2B La Paz
2B Maricopa
3B Mohave
5B Navajo
2B Pima
2B Pinal
3B Santa Cruz
4B Yavapai
2B Yuma
ARKANSAS
3A Arkansas
3A Ashley
4A Baxter
4A Benton
4A Boone
3A Bradley
3A Calhoun
4A Carroll
3A Chicot
3A Clark
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Clay
Cleburne
Cleveland
Columbia*
Conway
Craighead
Crawford
Crittenden
Cross
Dallas
Desha
Drew
Faulkner
Franklin
Fulton
Garland
Grant
Greene
Hempstead*
Hot Spring
Howard
Independence
Izard
Jackson
Jefferson
Johnson
Lafayette*
Lawrence
Lee
Lincoln
Little River*
Logan
Lonoke
Madison
Marion
Miller*
Mississippi
Monroe
Montgomery
Nevada
Newton
Ouachita
Perry
Phillips
Pike
Poinsett
Polk
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
Pope
Prairie
Pulaski
Randolph
Saline
Scott
Searcy
Sebastian
Sevier*
Sharp
St. Francis
Stone
Union*
Van Buren
Washington
White
Woodruff
Yell
CALIFORNIA
3C Alameda
6B Alpine
4B Amador
3B Butte
4B Calaveras
3B Colusa
3B Contra Costa
4C Del Norte
4B El Dorado
3B Fresno
3B Glenn
4C Humboldt
2B Imperial
4B Inyo
3B Kern
3B Kings
4B Lake
5B Lassen
3B Los Angeles
3B Madera
3C Marin
4B Mariposa
3C Mendocino
3B Merced
5B Modoc
6B Mono
3C Monterey
3C
5B
3B
3B
5B
3B
3B
3C
3B
3B
3C
3B
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3B
5B
5B
3B
3C
3B
3B
3B
4B
3B
4B
3C
3B
3B
Napa
Nevada
Orange
Placer
Plumas
Riverside
Sacramento
San Benito
San
Bernardino
San Diego
San Francisco
San Joaquin
San Luis
Obispo
San Mateo
Santa Barbara
Santa Clara
Santa Cruz
Shasta
Sierra
Siskiyou
Solano
Sonoma
Stanislaus
Sutter
Tehama
Trinity
Tulare
Tuolumne
Ventura
Yolo
Yuba
COLORADO
5B Adams
6B Alamosa
5B Arapahoe
6B Archuleta
4B Baca
5B Bent
5B Boulder
6B Chaffee
5B Cheyenne
7 Clear Creek
6B Conejos
6B Costilla
5B Crowley
6B Custer
5B Delta
5B Denver
6B Dolores
5B Douglas
6B Eagle
5B Elbert
5B El Paso
5B Fremont
5B
5B
7
7
7
5B
7
5B
5B
5B
7
5B
5B
4B
5B
5B
5B
7
6B
5B
5B
5B
4B
6B
7
5B
7
5B
5B
6B
7
7
6B
7
6B
5B
7
5B
5B
5B
5B
Garfield
Gilpin
Grand
Gunnison
Hinsdale
Huerfano
Jackson
Jefferson
Kiowa
Kit Carson
Lake
La Plata
Larimer
Las Animas
Lincoln
Logan
Mesa
Mineral
Moffat
Montezuma
Montrose
Morgan
Otero
Ouray
Park
Phillips
Pitkin
Prowers
Pueblo
Rio Blanco
Rio Grande
Routt
Saguache
San Juan
San Miguel
Sedgwick
Summit
Teller
Washington
Weld
Yuma
CONNECTICUT
5A (all)
DELAWARE
4A (all)
DISTRICT OF
COLUMBIA
4A (all)
FLORIDA
2A Alachua*
2A Baker*
2A Bay*
2A Bradford*
2A
1A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
1A
1A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
Brevard*
Broward*
Calhoun*
Charlotte*
Citrus*
Clay*
Collier*
Columbia*
DeSoto*
Dixie*
Duval*
Escambia*
Flagler*
Franklin*
Gadsden*
Gilchrist*
Glades*
Gulf*
Hamilton*
Hardee*
Hendry*
Hernando*
Highlands*
Hillsborough*
Holmes*
Indian River*
Jackson*
Jefferson*
Lafayette*
Lake*
Lee*
Leon*
Levy*
Liberty*
Madison*
Manatee*
Marion*
Martin*
Miami-Dade*
Monroe*
Nassau*
Okaloosa*
Okeechobee*
Orange*
Osceola*
Palm Beach*
Pasco*
Pinellas*
Polk*
Putnam*
Santa Rosa*
Sarasota*
Seminole*
St. Johns*
St. Lucie*
Sumter*
Suwannee*
2A
2A
3A
3A
2A
4A
3A
4A
GEORGIA
3A
2A Appling*
2A Atkinson*
4A
2A Bacon*
3A
2A Baker*
4A
3A Baldwin
3A
4A Banks
2A
3A Barrow
4A
3A Bartow
2A
3A Ben Hill*
3A
2A Berrien*
3A
3A Bibb
4A
3A Bleckley*
4A
2A Brantley*
3A
2A Brooks*
3A
2A Bryan*
3A
3A Bulloch*
3A
3A Burke
3A
3A Butts
3A
3A Calhoun*
3A
2A Camden*
3A
3A Candler*
3A
3A Carroll
3A
4A Catoosa
2A
2A Charlton*
3A
2A Chatham*
3A
3A Chattahoochee* 3A
4A Chattooga
3A
3A Cherokee
3A
3A Clarke
2A
3A Clay*
3A
3A Clayton
3A
2A Clinch*
2A
3A Cobb
3A
3A Coffee*
2A
2A Colquitt*
2A
3A Columbia
4A
2A Cook*
3A
3A Coweta
3A
3A Crawford
3A
3A Crisp*
3A
4A Dade
2A
4A Dawson
3A
2A Decatur*
2A
3A DeKalb
2A
3A Dodge*
3A
3A Dooly*
3A
3A Dougherty*
3A
3A Douglas
4A
3A Early*
3A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
Taylor*
Union*
Volusia*
Wakulla*
Walton*
Washington*
Echols*
Effingham*
Elbert
Emanuel*
Evans*
Fannin
Fayette
Floyd
Forsyth
Franklin
Fulton
Gilmer
Glascock
Glynn*
Gordon
Grady*
Greene
Gwinnett
Habersham
Hall
Hancock
Haralson
Harris
Hart
Heard
Henry
Houston*
Irwin*
Jackson
Jasper
Jeff Davis*
Jefferson
Jenkins*
Johnson*
Jones
Lamar
Lanier*
Laurens*
Lee*
Liberty*
Lincoln
Long*
Lowndes*
Lumpkin
Macon*
Madison
Marion*
McDuffie
McIntosh*
Meriwether
Miller*
Mitchell*
Monroe
Montgomery*
Morgan
Murray
Muscogee
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
2A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
2A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
4A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Newton
Oconee
Oglethorpe
Paulding
Peach*
Pickens
Pierce*
Pike
Polk
Pulaski*
Putnam
Quitman*
Rabun
Randolph*
Richmond
Rockdale
Schley*
Screven*
Seminole*
Spalding
Stephens
Stewart*
Sumter*
Talbot
Taliaferro
Tattnall*
Taylor*
Telfair*
Terrell*
Thomas*
Tift*
Toombs*
Towns
Treutlen*
Troup
Turner*
Twiggs*
Union
Upson
Walker
Walton
Ware*
Warren
Washington
Wayne*
Webster*
Wheeler*
White
Whitfield
Wilcox*
Wilkes
Wilkinson
Worth*
HAWAII
1A (all)*
IDAHO
5B Ada
6B Adams
6B Bannock
6B Bear Lake
5B Benewah
6B Bingham
6B Blaine
6B Boise
6B Bonner
6B Bonneville
6B Boundary
6B Butte
6B Camas
5B Canyon
6B Caribou
5B Cassia
6B Clark
5B Clearwater
6B Custer
5B Elmore
6B Franklin
6B Fremont
5B Gem
5B Gooding
5B Idaho
6B Jefferson
5B Jerome
5B Kootenai
5B Latah
6B Lemhi
5B Lewis
5B Lincoln
6B Madison
5B Minidoka
5B Nez Perce
6B Oneida
5B Owyhee
5B Payette
5B Power
5B Shoshone
6B Teton
5B Twin Falls
6B Valley
5B Washington
ILLINOIS
5A Adams
4A Alexander
4A Bond
5A Boone
5A Brown
5A Bureau
5A Calhoun
5A Carroll
5A Cass
5A Champaign
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
Christian
Clark
Clay
Clinton
Coles
Cook
Crawford
Cumberland
DeKalb
De Witt
Douglas
DuPage
Edgar
Edwards
Effingham
Fayette
Ford
Franklin
Fulton
Gallatin
Greene
Grundy
Hamilton
Hancock
Hardin
Henderson
Henry
Iroquois
Jackson
Jasper
Jefferson
Jersey
Jo Daviess
Johnson
Kane
Kankakee
Kendall
Knox
Lake
La Salle
Lawrence
Lee
Livingston
Logan
Macon
Macoupin
Madison
Marion
Marshall
Mason
Massac
McDonough
McHenry
McLean
Menard
Mercer
Monroe
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
Montgomery
Morgan
Moultrie
Ogle
Peoria
Perry
Piatt
Pike
Pope
Pulaski
Putnam
Randolph
Richland
Rock Island
Saline
Sangamon
Schuyler
Scott
Shelby
Stark
St. Clair
Stephenson
Tazewell
Union
Vermilion
Wabash
Warren
Washington
Wayne
White
Whiteside
Will
Williamson
Winnebago
Woodford
INDIANA
5A Adams
5A Allen
5A Bartholomew
5A Benton
5A Blackford
5A Boone
4A Brown
5A Carroll
5A Cass
4A Clark
5A Clay
5A Clinton
4A Crawford
4A Daviess
4A Dearborn
5A Decatur
5A De Kalb
5A Delaware
4A Dubois
5A Elkhart
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
Fayette
Floyd
Fountain
Franklin
Fulton
Gibson
Grant
Greene
Hamilton
Hancock
Harrison
Hendricks
Henry
Howard
Huntington
Jackson
Jasper
Jay
Jefferson
Jennings
Johnson
Knox
Kosciusko
Lagrange
Lake
La Porte
Lawrence
Madison
Marion
Marshall
Martin
Miami
Monroe
Montgomery
Morgan
Newton
Noble
Ohio
Orange
Owen
Parke
Perry
Pike
Porter
Posey
Pulaski
Putnam
Randolph
Ripley
Rush
Scott
Shelby
Spencer
Starke
Steuben
St. Joseph
Sullivan
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
Switzerland
Tippecanoe
Tipton
Union
Vanderburgh
Vermillion
Vigo
Wabash
Warren
Warrick
Washington
Wayne
Wells
White
Whitley
IOWA
5A Adair
5A Adams
6A Allamakee
5A Appanoose
5A Audubon
5A Benton
6A Black Hawk
5A Boone
6A Bremer
6A Buchanan
6A Buena Vista
6A Butler
6A Calhoun
5A Carroll
5A Cass
5A Cedar
6A Cerro Gordo
6A Cherokee
6A Chickasaw
5A Clarke
6A Clay
6A Clayton
5A Clinton
5A Crawford
5A Dallas
5A Davis
5A Decatur
6A Delaware
5A Des Moines
6A Dickinson
5A Dubuque
6A Emmet
6A Fayette
6A Floyd
6A Franklin
5A Fremont
5A Greene
6A Grundy
5A Guthrie
6A Hamilton
6A
6A
5A
5A
6A
6A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
6A
5A
6A
6A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
6A
6A
5A
Hancock
Hardin
Harrison
Henry
Howard
Humboldt
Ida
Iowa
Jackson
Jasper
Jefferson
Johnson
Jones
Keokuk
Kossuth
Lee
Linn
Louisa
Lucas
Lyon
Madison
Mahaska
Marion
Marshall
Mills
Mitchell
Monona
Monroe
Montgomery
Muscatine
O'Brien
Osceola
Page
Palo Alto
Plymouth
Pocahontas
Polk
Pottawattamie
Poweshiek
Ringgold
Sac
Scott
Shelby
Sioux
Story
Tama
Taylor
Union
Van Buren
Wapello
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Webster
Winnebago
Winneshiek
Woodbury
6A Worth
6A Wright
KANSAS
4A Allen
4A Anderson
4A Atchison
4A Barber
4A Barton
4A Bourbon
4A Brown
4A Butler
4A Chase
4A Chautauqua
4A Cherokee
5A Cheyenne
4A Clark
4A Clay
5A Cloud
4A Coffey
4A Comanche
4A Cowley
4A Crawford
5A Decatur
4A Dickinson
4A Doniphan
4A Douglas
4A Edwards
4A Elk
5A Ellis
4A Ellsworth
4A Finney
4A Ford
4A Franklin
4A Geary
5A Gove
5A Graham
4A Grant
4A Gray
5A Greeley
4A Greenwood
5A Hamilton
4A Harper
4A Harvey
4A Haskell
4A Hodgeman
4A Jackson
4A Jefferson
5A Jewell
4A Johnson
4A Kearny
4A Kingman
4A Kiowa
4A Labette
5A Lane
4A Leavenworth
4A Lincoln
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
Linn
Logan
Lyon
Marion
Marshall
McPherson
Meade
Miami
Mitchell
Montgomery
Morris
Morton
Nemaha
Neosho
Ness
Norton
Osage
Osborne
Ottawa
Pawnee
Phillips
Pottawatomie
Pratt
Rawlins
Reno
Republic
Rice
Riley
Rooks
Rush
Russell
Saline
Scott
Sedgwick
Seward
Shawnee
Sheridan
Sherman
Smith
Stafford
Stanton
Stevens
Sumner
Thomas
Trego
Wabaunsee
Wallace
Washington
Wichita
Wilson
Woodson
Wyandotte
KENTUCKY
4A (all)
LOUISIANA
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
2A
2A
3A
3A
2A
2A
3A
2A
2A
2A
2A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
2A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
Acadia*
Allen*
Ascension*
Assumption*
Avoyelles*
Beauregard*
Bienville*
Bossier*
Caddo*
Calcasieu*
Caldwell*
Cameron*
Catahoula*
Claiborne*
Concordia*
De Soto*
East Baton
Rouge*
East Carroll
East
Feliciana*
Evangeline*
Franklin*
Grant*
Iberia*
Iberville*
Jackson*
Jefferson*
Jefferson
Davis*
Lafayette*
Lafourche*
La Salle*
Lincoln*
Livingston*
Madison*
Morehouse
Natchitoches*
Orleans*
Ouachita*
Plaquemines*
Pointe
Coupee*
Rapides*
Red River*
Richland*
Sabine*
St. Bernard*
St. Charles*
St. Helena*
St. James*
St. John the
Baptist*
St. Landry*
St. Martin*
St. Mary*
St. Tammany*
2A
3A
2A
3A
2A
3A
2A
3A
2A
Tangipahoa*
Tensas*
Terrebonne*
Union*
Vermilion*
Vernon*
Washington*
Webster*
West Baton
Rouge*
3A West Carroll
2A West
Feliciana*
3A Winn*
MAINE
6A Androscoggin
7 Aroostook
6A Cumberland
6A Franklin
6A Hancock
6A Kennebec
6A Knox
6A Lincoln
6A Oxford
6A Penobscot
6A Piscataquis
6A Sagadahoc
6A Somerset
6A Waldo
6A Washington
6A York
MARYLAND
4A Allegany
4A Anne Arundel
4A Baltimore
4A Baltimore
(city)
4A Calvert
4A Caroline
4A Carroll
4A Cecil
4A Charles
4A Dorchester
4A Frederick
5A Garrett
4A Harford
4A Howard
4A Kent
4A Montgomery
4A Prince
George's
4A Queen Anne's
4A Somerset
4A St. Mary's
4A Talbot
4A Washington
4A Wicomico
4A Worcester
MASSACHUSETTS
5A (all)
MICHIGAN
6A Alcona
6A Alger
5A Allegan
6A Alpena
6A Antrim
6A Arenac
7 Baraga
5A Barry
5A Bay
6A Benzie
5A Berrien
5A Branch
5A Calhoun
5A Cass
6A Charlevoix
6A Cheboygan
7 Chippewa
6A Clare
5A Clinton
6A Crawford
6A Delta
6A Dickinson
5A Eaton
6A Emmet
5A Genesee
6A Gladwin
7 Gogebic
6A Grand
Traverse
5A Gratiot
5A Hillsdale
7 Houghton
6A Huron
5A Ingham
5A Ionia
6A Iosco
7 Iron
6A Isabella
5A Jackson
5A Kalamazoo
6A Kalkaska
5A Kent
7 Keweenaw
6A Lake
5A Lapeer
6A Leelanau
5A Lenawee
5A Livingston
7 Luce
7
5A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
5A
6A
5A
5A
6A
5A
6A
5A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
5A
6A
6A
5A
6A
7
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
Mackinac
Macomb
Manistee
Marquette
Mason
Mecosta
Menominee
Midland
Missaukee
Monroe
Montcalm
Montmorency
Muskegon
Newaygo
Oakland
Oceana
Ogemaw
Ontonagon
Osceola
Oscoda
Otsego
Ottawa
Presque Isle
Roscommon
Saginaw
Sanilac
Schoolcraft
Shiawassee
St. Clair
St. Joseph
Tuscola
Van Buren
Washtenaw
Wayne
Wexford
MINNESOTA
7 Aitkin
6A Anoka
7 Becker
7 Beltrami
6A Benton
6A Big Stone
6A Blue Earth
6A Brown
7 Carlton
6A Carver
7 Cass
6A Chippewa
6A Chisago
7 Clay
7 Clearwater
7 Cook
6A Cottonwood
7 Crow Wing
6A Dakota
6A Dodge
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
7
6A
7
6A
7
6A
7
7
6A
7
7
6A
6A
6A
7
7
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
7
7
7
6A
7
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
Douglas
Faribault
Fillmore
Freeborn
Goodhue
Grant
Hennepin
Houston
Hubbard
Isanti
Itasca
Jackson
Kanabec
Kandiyohi
Kittson
Koochiching
Lac qui Parle
Lake
Lake of the
Woods
Le Sueur
Lincoln
Lyon
Mahnomen
Marshall
Martin
McLeod
Meeker
Mille Lacs
Morrison
Mower
Murray
Nicollet
Nobles
Norman
Olmsted
Otter Tail
Pennington
Pine
Pipestone
Polk
Pope
Ramsey
Red Lake
Redwood
Renville
Rice
Rock
Roseau
Scott
Sherburne
Sibley
Stearns
Steele
Stevens
St. Louis
Swift
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
Todd
Traverse
Wabasha
Wadena
Waseca
Washington
Watonwan
Wilkin
Winona
Wright
Yellow
Medicine
MISSISSIPPI
3A Adams*
3A Alcorn
3A Amite*
3A Attala
3A Benton
3A Bolivar
3A Calhoun
3A Carroll
3A Chickasaw
3A Choctaw
3A Claiborne*
3A Clarke
3A Clay
3A Coahoma
3A Copiah*
3A Covington*
3A DeSoto
3A Forrest*
3A Franklin*
3A George*
3A Greene*
3A Grenada
2A Hancock*
2A Harrison*
3A Hinds*
3A Holmes
3A Humphreys
3A Issaquena
3A Itawamba
2A Jackson*
3A Jasper
3A Jefferson*
3A Jefferson
Davis*
3A Jones*
3A Kemper
3A Lafayette
3A Lamar*
3A Lauderdale
3A Lawrence*
3A Leake
3A Lee
3A Leflore
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Lincoln*
Lowndes
Madison
Marion*
Marshall
Monroe
Montgomery
Neshoba
Newton
Noxubee
Oktibbeha
Panola
Pearl River*
Perry*
Pike*
Pontotoc
Prentiss
Quitman
Rankin*
Scott
Sharkey
Simpson*
Smith*
Stone*
Sunflower
Tallahatchie
Tate
Tippah
Tishomingo
Tunica
Union
Walthall*
Warren*
Washington
Wayne*
Webster
Wilkinson*
Winston
Yalobusha
Yazoo
MISSOURI
5A Adair
5A Andrew
5A Atchison
4A Audrain
4A Barry
4A Barton
4A Bates
4A Benton
4A Bollinger
4A Boone
5A Buchanan
4A Butler
5A Caldwell
4A Callaway
4A Camden
4A Cape
Girardeau
4A Carroll
4A Carter
4A Cass
4A Cedar
5A Chariton
4A Christian
5A Clark
4A Clay
5A Clinton
4A Cole
4A Cooper
4A Crawford
4A Dade
4A Dallas
5A Daviess
5A DeKalb
4A Dent
4A Douglas
4A Dunklin
4A Franklin
4A Gasconade
5A Gentry
4A Greene
5A Grundy
5A Harrison
4A Henry
4A Hickory
5A Holt
4A Howard
4A Howell
4A Iron
4A Jackson
4A Jasper
4A Jefferson
4A Johnson
5A Knox
4A Laclede
4A Lafayette
4A Lawrence
5A Lewis
4A Lincoln
5A Linn
5A Livingston
5A Macon
4A Madison
4A Maries
5A Marion
4A McDonald
5A Mercer
4A Miller
4A Mississippi
4A Moniteau
4A Monroe
4A Montgomery
4A Morgan
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
New Madrid
Newton
Nodaway
Oregon
Osage
Ozark
Pemiscot
Perry
Pettis
Phelps
Pike
Platte
Polk
Pulaski
Putnam
Ralls
Randolph
Ray
Reynolds
Ripley
Saline
Schuyler
Scotland
Scott
Shannon
Shelby
St. Charles
St. Clair
Ste.
Genevieve
St. Francois
St. Louis
St. Louis
(city)
Stoddard
Stone
Sullivan
Taney
Texas
Vernon
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Webster
Worth
Wright
MONTANA
6B (all)
NEBRASKA
5A (all)
NEVADA
5B Carson City
(city)
5B Churchill
3B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
Clark
Douglas
Elko
Esmeralda
Eureka
Humboldt
Lander
Lincoln
Lyon
Mineral
Nye
Pershing
Storey
Washoe
White Pine
NEW HAMPSHIRE
6A Belknap
6A Carroll
5A Cheshire
6A Coos
6A Grafton
5A Hillsborough
6A Merrimack
5A Rockingham
5A Strafford
6A Sullivan
NEW JERSEY
4A Atlantic
5A Bergen
4A Burlington
4A Camden
4A Cape May
4A Cumberland
4A Essex
4A Gloucester
4A Hudson
5A Hunterdon
5A Mercer
4A Middlesex
4A Monmouth
5A Morris
4A Ocean
5A Passaic
4A Salem
5A Somerset
5A Sussex
4A Union
5A Warren
NEW MEXICO
4B Bernalillo
5B Catron
3B Chaves
4B Cibola
5B Colfax
4B
4B
3B
3B
4B
4B
5B
3B
3B
4B
5B
3B
5B
5B
3B
4B
5B
4B
5B
5B
5B
5B
4B
4B
5B
5B
4B
4B
Curry
DeBaca
Dona Ana
Eddy
Grant
Guadalupe
Harding
Hidalgo
Lea
Lincoln
Los Alamos
Luna
McKinley
Mora
Otero
Quay
Rio Arriba
Roosevelt
Sandoval
San Juan
San Miguel
Santa Fe
Sierra
Socorro
Taos
Torrance
Union
Valencia
NEW YORK
5A Albany
6A Allegany
4A Bronx
6A Broome
6A Cattaraugus
5A Cayuga
5A Chautauqua
5A Chemung
6A Chenango
6A Clinton
5A Columbia
5A Cortland
6A Delaware
5A Dutchess
5A Erie
6A Essex
6A Franklin
6A Fulton
5A Genesee
5A Greene
6A Hamilton
6A Herkimer
6A Jefferson
4A Kings
6A Lewis
5A Livingston
6A Madison
5A
6A
4A
4A
5A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
6A
6A
5A
6A
6A
4A
6A
5A
6A
6A
6A
5A
5A
4A
6A
5A
Monroe
Montgomery
Nassau
New York
Niagara
Oneida
Onondaga
Ontario
Orange
Orleans
Oswego
Otsego
Putnam
Queens
Rensselaer
Richmond
Rockland
Saratoga
Schenectady
Schoharie
Schuyler
Seneca
Steuben
St. Lawrence
Suffolk
Sullivan
Tioga
Tompkins
Ulster
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Westchester
Wyoming
Yates
NORTH CAROLINA
4A Alamance
4A Alexander
5A Alleghany
3A Anson
5A Ashe
5A Avery
3A Beaufort
4A Bertie
3A Bladen
3A Brunswick*
4A Buncombe
4A Burke
3A Cabarrus
4A Caldwell
3A Camden
3A Carteret*
4A Caswell
4A Catawba
4A Chatham
4A Cherokee
3A
4A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
3A
4A
4A
3A
3A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
3A
5A
3A
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
3A
Chowan
Clay
Cleveland
Columbus*
Craven
Cumberland
Currituck
Dare
Davidson
Davie
Duplin
Durham
Edgecombe
Forsyth
Franklin
Gaston
Gates
Graham
Granville
Greene
Guilford
Halifax
Harnett
Haywood
Henderson
Hertford
Hoke
Hyde
Iredell
Jackson
Johnston
Jones
Lee
Lenoir
Lincoln
Macon
Madison
Martin
McDowell
Mecklenburg
Mitchell
Montgomery
Moore
Nash
New Hanover*
Northampton
Onslow*
Orange
Pamlico
Pasquotank
Pender*
Perquimans
Person
Pitt
Polk
Randolph
Richmond
3A
4A
3A
4A
3A
3A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
3A
4A
4A
4A
3A
5A
3A
4A
3A
4A
5A
Robeson
Rockingham
Rowan
Rutherford
Sampson
Scotland
Stanly
Stokes
Surry
Swain
Transylvania
Tyrrell
Union
Vance
Wake
Warren
Washington
Watauga
Wayne
Wilkes
Wilson
Yadkin
Yancey
NORTH DAKOTA
6A Adams
7 Barnes
7 Benson
6A Billings
7 Bottineau
6A Bowman
7 Burke
6A Burleigh
7 Cass
7 Cavalier
6A Dickey
7 Divide
6A Dunn
7 Eddy
6A Emmons
7 Foster
6A Golden Valley
7 Grand Forks
6A Grant
7 Griggs
6A Hettinger
7 Kidder
6A LaMoure
6A Logan
7 McHenry
6A McIntosh
6A McKenzie
7 McLean
6A Mercer
6A Morton
7 Mountrail
7 Nelson
6A
7
7
7
6A
7
6A
7
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Oliver
Pembina
Pierce
Ramsey
Ransom
Renville
Richland
Rolette
Sargent
Sheridan
Sioux
Slope
Stark
Steele
Stutsman
Towner
Traill
Walsh
Ward
Wells
Williams
OHIO
4A Adams
5A Allen
5A Ashland
5A Ashtabula
5A Athens
5A Auglaize
5A Belmont
4A Brown
5A Butler
5A Carroll
5A Champaign
5A Clark
4A Clermont
5A Clinton
5A Columbiana
5A Coshocton
5A Crawford
5A Cuyahoga
5A Darke
5A Defiance
5A Delaware
5A Erie
5A Fairfield
5A Fayette
5A Franklin
5A Fulton
4A Gallia
5A Geauga
5A Greene
5A Guernsey
4A Hamilton
5A Hancock
5A Hardin
5A Harrison
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
Henry
Highland
Hocking
Holmes
Huron
Jackson
Jefferson
Knox
Lake
Lawrence
Licking
Logan
Lorain
Lucas
Madison
Mahoning
Marion
Medina
Meigs
Mercer
Miami
Monroe
Montgomery
Morgan
Morrow
Muskingum
Noble
Ottawa
Paulding
Perry
Pickaway
Pike
Portage
Preble
Putnam
Richland
Ross
Sandusky
Scioto
Seneca
Shelby
Stark
Summit
Trumbull
Tuscarawas
Union
Van Wert
Vinton
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Williams
Wood
Wyandot
OKLAHOMA
3A Adair
3A
3A
4B
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4B
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Alfalfa
Atoka
Beaver
Beckham
Blaine
Bryan
Caddo
Canadian
Carter
Cherokee
Choctaw
Cimarron
Cleveland
Coal
Comanche
Cotton
Craig
Creek
Custer
Delaware
Dewey
Ellis
Garfield
Garvin
Grady
Grant
Greer
Harmon
Harper
Haskell
Hughes
Jackson
Jefferson
Johnston
Kay
Kingfisher
Kiowa
Latimer
Le Flore
Lincoln
Logan
Love
Major
Marshall
Mayes
McClain
McCurtain
McIntosh
Murray
Muskogee
Noble
Nowata
Okfuskee
Oklahoma
Okmulgee
Osage
Ottawa
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
4B
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Pawnee
Payne
Pittsburg
Pontotoc
Pottawatomie
Pushmataha
Roger Mills
Rogers
Seminole
Sequoyah
Stephens
Texas
Tillman
Tulsa
Wagoner
Washington
Washita
Woods
Woodward
OREGON
5B Baker
4C Benton
4C Clackamas
4C Clatsop
4C Columbia
4C Coos
5B Crook
4C Curry
5B Deschutes
4C Douglas
5B Gilliam
5B Grant
5B Harney
5B Hood River
4C Jackson
5B Jefferson
4C Josephine
5B Klamath
5B Lake
4C Lane
4C Lincoln
4C Linn
5B Malheur
4C Marion
5B Morrow
4C Multnomah
4C Polk
5B Sherman
4C Tillamook
5B Umatilla
5B Union
5B Wallowa
5B Wasco
4C Washington
5B Wheeler
4C Yamhill
PENNSYLVANIA
5A Adams
5A Allegheny
5A Armstrong
5A Beaver
5A Bedford
5A Berks
5A Blair
5A Bradford
4A Bucks
5A Butler
5A Cambria
6A Cameron
5A Carbon
5A Centre
4A Chester
5A Clarion
6A Clearfield
5A Clinton
5A Columbia
5A Crawford
5A Cumberland
5A Dauphin
4A Delaware
6A Elk
5A Erie
5A Fayette
5A Forest
5A Franklin
5A Fulton
5A Greene
5A Huntingdon
5A Indiana
5A Jefferson
5A Juniata
5A Lackawanna
5A Lancaster
5A Lawrence
5A Lebanon
5A Lehigh
5A Luzerne
5A Lycoming
6A McKean
5A Mercer
5A Mifflin
5A Monroe
4A Montgomery
5A Montour
5A Northampton
5A Northumberland
5A Perry
4A Philadelphia
5A Pike
6A Potter
5A Schuylkill
5A Snyder
5A
5A
6A
6A
5A
5A
5A
5A
6A
5A
5A
4A
Somerset
Sullivan
Susquehanna
Tioga
Union
Venango
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Westmoreland
Wyoming
York
RHODE ISLAND
5A (all)
SOUTH CAROLINA
3A Abbeville
3A Aiken
3A Allendale*
3A Anderson
3A Bamberg*
3A Barnwell*
3A Beaufort*
3A Berkeley*
3A Calhoun
3A Charleston*
3A Cherokee
3A Chester
3A Chesterfield
3A Clarendon
3A Colleton*
3A Darlington
3A Dillon
3A Dorchester*
3A Edgefield
3A Fairfield
3A Florence
3A Georgetown*
3A Greenville
3A Greenwood
3A Hampton*
3A Horry*
3A Jasper*
3A Kershaw
3A Lancaster
3A Laurens
3A Lee
3A Lexington
3A Marion
3A Marlboro
3A McCormick
3A Newberry
3A Oconee
3A Orangeburg
3A Pickens
3A Richland
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
Saluda
Spartanburg
Sumter
Union
Williamsburg
York
SOUTH DAKOTA
6A Aurora
6A Beadle
5A Bennett
5A Bon Homme
6A Brookings
6A Brown
6A Brule
6A Buffalo
6A Butte
6A Campbell
5A Charles Mix
6A Clark
5A Clay
6A Codington
6A Corson
6A Custer
6A Davison
6A Day
6A Deuel
6A Dewey
5A Douglas
6A Edmunds
6A Fall River
6A Faulk
6A Grant
5A Gregory
6A Haakon
6A Hamlin
6A Hand
6A Hanson
6A Harding
6A Hughes
5A Hutchinson
6A Hyde
5A Jackson
6A Jerauld
6A Jones
6A Kingsbury
6A Lake
6A Lawrence
6A Lincoln
6A Lyman
6A Marshall
6A McCook
6A McPherson
6A Meade
5A Mellette
6A Miner
6A Minnehaha
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
5A
5A
6A
5A
6A
5A
6A
Moody
Pennington
Perkins
Potter
Roberts
Sanborn
Shannon
Spink
Stanley
Sully
Todd
Tripp
Turner
Union
Walworth
Yankton
Ziebach
TENNESSEE
4A Anderson
4A Bedford
4A Benton
4A Bledsoe
4A Blount
4A Bradley
4A Campbell
4A Cannon
4A Carroll
4A Carter
4A Cheatham
3A Chester
4A Claiborne
4A Clay
4A Cocke
4A Coffee
3A Crockett
4A Cumberland
4A Davidson
4A Decatur
4A DeKalb
4A Dickson
3A Dyer
3A Fayette
4A Fentress
4A Franklin
4A Gibson
4A Giles
4A Grainger
4A Greene
4A Grundy
4A Hamblen
4A Hamilton
4A Hancock
3A Hardeman
3A Hardin
4A Hawkins
3A Haywood
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
3A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
Henderson
Henry
Hickman
Houston
Humphreys
Jackson
Jefferson
Johnson
Knox
Lake
Lauderdale
Lawrence
Lewis
Lincoln
Loudon
Macon
Madison
Marion
Marshall
Maury
McMinn
McNairy
Meigs
Monroe
Montgomery
Moore
Morgan
Obion
Overton
Perry
Pickett
Polk
Putnam
Rhea
Roane
Robertson
Rutherford
Scott
Sequatchie
Sevier
Shelby
Smith
Stewart
Sullivan
Sumner
Tipton
Trousdale
Unicoi
Union
Van Buren
Warren
Washington
Wayne
Weakley
White
Williamson
Wilson
TEXAS
2A Anderson*
3B Andrews
2A Angelina*
2A Aransas*
3A Archer
4B Armstrong
2A Atascosa*
2A Austin*
4B Bailey
2B Bandera*
2A Bastrop*
3B Baylor
2A Bee*
2A Bell*
2A Bexar*
3A Blanco*
3B Borden
2A Bosque*
3A Bowie*
2A Brazoria*
2A Brazos*
3B Brewster
4B Briscoe
2A Brooks*
3A Brown*
2A Burleson*
3A Burnet*
2A Caldwell*
2A Calhoun*
3B Callahan
2A Cameron*
3A Camp*
4B Carson
3A Cass*
4B Castro
2A Chambers*
2A Cherokee*
3B Childress
3A Clay
4B Cochran
3B Coke
3B Coleman
3A Collin*
3B Collingsworth
2A Colorado*
2A Comal*
3A Comanche*
3B Concho
3A Cooke
2A Coryell*
3B Cottle
3B Crane
3B Crockett
3B Crosby
3B Culberson
4B
3A
3B
4B
3A
3A
2A
3B
2B
4B
2A
3A
3B
2B
3A
3B
3A
2A
3A
2A
3B
4B
3B
2A
3A
2A
2B
3B
2A
3B
3A
3B
2A
2A
4B
3A
3A
2A
2A
4B
3B
3A
4B
3B
2A
2A
3A
4B
3B
2A
3B
3A
2A
2A
4B
3A
3A
Dallam
Dallas*
Dawson
Deaf Smith
Delta
Denton*
DeWitt*
Dickens
Dimmit*
Donley
Duval*
Eastland
Ector
Edwards*
Ellis*
El Paso
Erath*
Falls*
Fannin
Fayette*
Fisher
Floyd
Foard
Fort Bend*
Franklin*
Freestone*
Frio*
Gaines
Galveston*
Garza
Gillespie*
Glasscock
Goliad*
Gonzales*
Gray
Grayson
Gregg*
Grimes*
Guadalupe*
Hale
Hall
Hamilton*
Hansford
Hardeman
Hardin*
Harris*
Harrison*
Hartley
Haskell
Hays*
Hemphill
Henderson*
Hidalgo*
Hill*
Hockley
Hood*
Hopkins*
2A
3B
3B
3A
4B
3B
3A
2A
2A
3B
2A
2A
2A
3A
3B
2A
3A
3A
2A
3B
3B
3B
3B
2B
2A
3B
3A
4B
3A
2B
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
4B
2A
3A
3B
3B
3B
2A
3A
3B
3B
2A
2B
3B
2A
2A
2B
3B
3B
2A
3A
3B
3A
Houston*
Howard
Hudspeth
Hunt*
Hutchinson
Irion
Jack
Jackson*
Jasper*
Jeff Davis
Jefferson*
Jim Hogg*
Jim Wells*
Johnson*
Jones
Karnes*
Kaufman*
Kendall*
Kenedy*
Kent
Kerr
Kimble
King
Kinney*
Kleberg*
Knox
Lamar*
Lamb
Lampasas*
La Salle*
Lavaca*
Lee*
Leon*
Liberty*
Limestone*
Lipscomb
Live Oak*
Llano*
Loving
Lubbock
Lynn
Madison*
Marion*
Martin
Mason
Matagorda*
Maverick*
McCulloch
McLennan*
McMullen*
Medina*
Menard
Midland
Milam*
Mills*
Mitchell
Montague
2A
4B
3A
3B
3A
3A
2A
3B
2A
4B
4B
2A
3A
3A
3A
4B
3B
2A
4B
3B
3A
4B
3B
2B
3A
3B
2A
4B
2A
3A
3B
3A
3A
3A
2A
2A
3A
3B
3B
3B
3A
4B
3A
3A
2A
3A
3B
3B
3B
4B
3A
3B
3B
3B
3B
3A
Montgomery*
Moore
Morris*
Motley
Nacogdoches*
Navarro*
Newton*
Nolan
Nueces*
Ochiltree
Oldham
Orange*
Palo Pinto*
Panola*
Parker*
Parmer
Pecos
Polk*
Potter
Presidio
Rains*
Randall
Reagan
Real*
Red River*
Reeves
Refugio*
Roberts
Robertson*
Rockwall*
Runnels
Rusk*
Sabine*
San
Augustine*
San Jacinto*
San Patricio*
San Saba*
Schleicher
Scurry
Shackelford
Shelby*
Sherman
Smith*
Somervell*
Starr*
Stephens
Sterling
Stonewall
Sutton
Swisher
Tarrant*
Taylor
Terrell
Terry
Throckmorton
Titus*
3B
2A
2A
2A
3A
3B
2B
2B
3A
2A
2A
2A
3B
2A
2B
2A
3B
3A
3B
2A
2A
2A
3B
3A
3A
4B
3A
2B
2B
Tom Green
Travis*
Trinity*
Tyler*
Upshur*
Upton
Uvalde*
Val Verde*
Van Zandt*
Victoria*
Walker*
Waller*
Ward
Washington*
Webb*
Wharton*
Wheeler
Wichita
Wilbarger
Willacy*
Williamson*
Wilson*
Winkler
Wise
Wood*
Yoakum
Young
Zapata*
Zavala*
UTAH
5B Beaver
6B Box Elder
6B Cache
6B Carbon
6B Daggett
5B Davis
6B Duchesne
5B Emery
5B Garfield
5B Grand
5B Iron
5B Juab
5B Kane
5B Millard
6B Morgan
5B Piute
6B Rich
5B Salt Lake
5B San Juan
5B Sanpete
5B Sevier
6B Summit
5B Tooele
6B Uintah
5B Utah
6B Wasatch
WASHINGTON
5B Adams
5B Asotin
5B Benton
5B Chelan
4C Clallam
4C Clark
5B Columbia
4C Cowlitz
5B Douglas
6B Ferry
5B Franklin
5B Garfield
5B Grant
4C Grays Harbor
4C Island
4C Jefferson
4C King
4C Kitsap
5B Kittitas
5B Klickitat
4C Lewis
5B Lincoln
4C Mason
6B Okanogan
4C Pacific
6B Pend Oreille
4C Pierce
4C San Juan
4C Skagit
5B Skamania
4C Snohomish
5B Spokane
6B Stevens
4C Thurston
4C Wahkiakum
5B Walla Walla
4C Whatcom
5B Whitman
5B Yakima
4A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
5A
4A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
5A
5A
5A
4A
5A
4A
5A
5A
4A
4A
4A
WEST VIRGINIA
5A Barbour
4A Berkeley
4A Boone
4A Braxton
5A Brooke
WISCONSIN
6A Adams
7 Ashland
6A Barron
7 Bayfield
6A Brown
3B Washington
5B Wayne
5B Weber
VERMONT
6A (all)
VIRGINIA
4A (all)
Cabell
Calhoun
Clay
Doddridge
Fayette
Gilmer
Grant
Greenbrier
Hampshire
Hancock
Hardy
Harrison
Jackson
Jefferson
Kanawha
Lewis
Lincoln
Logan
Marion
Marshall
Mason
McDowell
Mercer
Mineral
Mingo
Monongalia
Monroe
Morgan
Nicholas
Ohio
Pendleton
Pleasants
Pocahontas
Preston
Putnam
Raleigh
Randolph
Ritchie
Roane
Summers
Taylor
Tucker
Tyler
Upshur
Wayne
Webster
Wetzel
Wirt
Wood
Wyoming
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
7
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
7
6A
Buffalo
Burnett
Calumet
Chippewa
Clark
Columbia
Crawford
Dane
Dodge
Door
Douglas
Dunn
Eau Claire
Florence
Fond du Lac
Forest
Grant
Green
Green Lake
Iowa
Iron
Jackson
Jefferson
Juneau
Kenosha
Kewaunee
La Crosse
Lafayette
Langlade
Lincoln
Manitowoc
Marathon
Marinette
Marquette
Menominee
Milwaukee
Monroe
Oconto
Oneida
Outagamie
Ozaukee
Pepin
Pierce
Polk
Portage
Price
Racine
Richland
Rock
Rusk
Sauk
Sawyer
Shawano
Sheboygan
St. Croix
Taylor
Trempealeau
6A
7
6A
7
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
Vernon
Vilas
Walworth
Washburn
Washington
Waukesha
Waupaca
Waushara
Winnebago
Wood
WYOMING
6B Albany
6B Big Horn
6B Campbell
6B Carbon
6B Converse
6B Crook
6B Fremont
5B Goshen
6B Hot Springs
6B Johnson
6B Laramie
7 Lincoln
6B Natrona
6B Niobrara
6B Park
5B Platte
6B Sheridan
7 Sublette
6B Sweetwater
7 Teton
6B Uinta
6B Washakie
6B Weston
US TERRITORIES
AMERICAN SAMOA
1A (all)*
GUAM
1A (all)*
NORTHERN MARIANA
ISLANDS
1A (all)*
PUERTO RICO
1A (all)*
VIRGIN ISLANDS
1A (all)*
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2119-1
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
???? 2014
SECTION 07 2119
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Foamed-in-place insulation.
1. In masonry cavity walls.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
B.
ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
D.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
E.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
F.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, insulation properties, overcoat properties, and
preparation requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air
and substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cell
polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.
1. Aged Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu (0.9 (K sqm)/W), minimum,
when tested at 1 inch (25.4 mm) thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for
180 days at 41 degrees F (23 degrees C).
2. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D2842.
3. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft (0.2 L/second sq meter), maximum, when tested at
intended thickness in accordance with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283 at 1.5 psf (75 Pa).
4. Closed Cell Content: At least 90 percent.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Products:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2119-2
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
???? 2014
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat
adhesion.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting.
B.
Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2500-1
WEATHER BARRIERS
???? 2014
SECTION 07 2500
WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air
tight or vapor retardant.
B.
Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints
between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.
B.
Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
C.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
D.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt
insulation.
E.
Section 07 2400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Water-resistive barrier under exterior
insulation.
F.
Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing
system.
G.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with
weather barriers.
H.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
I.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor
retarders.
B.
Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor
permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent
surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are
classified as vapor retarders.
C.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, to
the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; 2012.
B.
ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).
C.
ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
E.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
F.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.
G.
ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.;
2013.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
H.
07 2500-2
WEATHER BARRIERS
???? 2014
ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive
Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2012.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation methods, and storage
and handling criteria.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding.
B.
Air Barrier:
1. On outside surface of inside wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls use air barrier coating.
2. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating.
2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)
A.
Air Barrier, Fluid Applied: Vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing.
B.
Air Barrier Coating:
1. Material: Silica-fortified rubber.
2. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp
surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without
requiring a primer.
3. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due to
delamination of sheathing.
4. Dry Film Thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch) (25 mm), minimum.
5. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.
6. Water Vapor Permeance: 10 perms (574 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
7. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum
of 3 months weather exposure.
8. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.
9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed
index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
10. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970.
11. Code Acceptance: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria
AC212.
12. Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by coating manufacturer.
13. Products:
a. BASF Corporation; ENERSHIELD-HP: www.enershield.basf.com.
b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Barritech-VP: www.carlisle-ccw.com.
c. Epro Services, Inc.; ECOFLEX-PS: www.eproserv.com.
d. Mar-flex Waterproofing & Building Products; Air Barrier 1200VP: www.mar-flex.com.
e. Parex USA, Inc.; Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-on (with gauging aggregate):
www.parexusa.com.
f.
Parex USA, Inc.; Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-on: www.parexusa.com.
g. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield LMP: www.wrmeadows.com.
h. W.R. Grace, Inc.; Permabarrier VP.
i.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2500-3
WEATHER BARRIERS
???? 2014
B.
Sealant Backers: As specified in Section 07 9005.
C.
Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer,
appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip
resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.
1. Composition: Any material that meets physical requirements of ASTM D1970 with
exceptions indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
proper installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped
to shed water but with seams not sealed.
C.
Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and
with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
D.
Coatings:
1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in
substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installing
weather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight.
3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.
E.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches
(125 mm) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches (150 mm) up jambs; mechanically
fasten stretched edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges
using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4
inches (100 mm) wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of
opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches (230 mm) wide, covering entire depth of
framing.
4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches (50
mm) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,
using joint sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to
weather barrier surface.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
B.
Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a
mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 2500-4
WEATHER BARRIERS
???? 2014
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4113-1
METAL ROOF PANELS
???? 2014
SECTION 07 4113
METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Architectural roofing system of preformed aluminum panels.
B.
Thermal roof insulation.
C.
Fastening system.
D.
Factory finishing.
E.
Accessories and miscellaneous components.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
B.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid roof insulation.
C.
Section 07 4213 - Metal Wall Panels: Preformed wall panels.
D.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
B.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
C.
ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
E.
ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installation methods.
3. Specimen warranty.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,
spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.
1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.
D.
Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems
similar to those required for this project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation.
B.
Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to
panels prior to installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4113-2
METAL ROOF PANELS
???? 2014
B.
Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied
exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence
of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified
warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofing
system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within
specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com.
2. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com.
3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com.
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified
requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement
of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.
B.
Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.
1. Aluminum Panels:
a. Alloy: Aluminum conforming to ASTM B209/B 209M; temper as required for forming.
b. Thickness: Minimum 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).
2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 2.0 inch (51 mm) seam height; concealed fastener
system for field seaming with special tool.
3. Texture: Smooth.
4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. Where lapped joints are
unavoidable, space laps so that each sheet spans over three or more supports.
5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 24 inches (610 mm).
2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM
A.
Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum
concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet
performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.
2.04 PANEL FINISH
A.
Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard multi-coat thermocured coating
system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm); color and gloss to match sample.
2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings,
closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness,
and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may
optionally be made of stainless steel.
1. Downspouts: Open face, rectangular profile.
B.
Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion
resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam.
C.
Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9005.
1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.
2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.
D.
Thermal Insulation: Provide rigid type, faced with white, flexible, non-dusting vapor retarder
tested for maximum flame-spread rating of 50, per ASTM E84; for installation using spacer
blocks.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
E.
07 4113-3
METAL ROOF PANELS
???? 2014
Thickness: As indicated.
Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically
fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams.
1. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.
2. Flammability: Minimum of Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E108.
3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.
4. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or
approval, if any.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard
processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly
prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Broom clean wood sheathing prior to installation of roofing system.
B.
Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other
adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.
C.
Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film
carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.
D.
Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt
sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.
E.
Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal
joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.
Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and
structural movement.
1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise
recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.
2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods
that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.
B.
Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including
flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps,
equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.
C.
Install roofing felt and building paper slip sheet on roof deck before installing preformed metal
roof panels. Secure by methods acceptable to roof panel manufacturer, minimizing use of metal
fasteners. Apply from eaves to ridge in shingle fashion, overlapping horizontal joints a minimum
of 2 inches (50 mm) and side and end laps a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Offset seams in
building paper and seams in roofing felt.
D.
Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizing
transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.
1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic
mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
E.
07 4113-4
METAL ROOF PANELS
???? 2014
Install sealant or sealant tape, as recommended by panel manufacturer, at end laps and
side joints.
Insulation: Install insulation between roof covering and supporting members to present a neat
appearance. Fold, staple, and tape seams unless otherwise approved by Architect.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary
walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until
completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-1
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
SECTION 07 4230
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Textured, aluminum metal plate wall panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall panel substrates support framing.
B.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood substrate wall sheathing
C.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Field formed flashings and other sheet metal
work.
1.03 DEFINITION
A.
Metal Plate Wall Panel Assembly: Metal plate wall panels, attachment system components,
miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weather tight wall
system based on AAMA CW-RS-1.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association (www.aamanet.org)
1. AAMA CW-RS-1 - The Rain Screen Principle and Pressure Equalized Wall Design; 2004
2. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure; 2005
3. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2009
4. AAMA 508 - Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain Screen
Wall Cladding Systems; 2007
5. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 1998
6. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures
for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2011
(Testing based on 2005 Edition)
B.
ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials; www.astm.org)
1. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2011
2. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
<http://www.astm.org/Standards/C754.htm>; 2009
3. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 2008
4. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 2011
5. ASTM D 2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%
Relative Humidity; 2011
6. ASTM D 4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films; 2007
7. ASTM E 8/E 8M - Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials; 2009
8. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen; 2004.
9. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2010
10. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2009
11. ASTM E 1233 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential; 2006
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-2
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
C.
TAS - Testing Application Standards; Florida Building Code, 2007
1. TAS 202 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope
Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure Loading; 1994
2. TAS 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading; 1994
D.
LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
E.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
F.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association
G.
PS - Voluntary Product Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
1. PS-1 - Structural Plywood; 2007
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate panel assemblies with rain drainage, flashing, trim, stud back-up,
soffits, and other adjoining work.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting:
1. Attendees:
a. Owner.
b. Architect
c. Installer.
d. Panel manufacturer's representative.
e. Structural support installer.
f.
Installer's whose work interfaces with or affects wall panels including installers of
doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule.
3. Verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to
maintain schedule.
4. Review means and methods related to installation, including manufacturer's written
instructions.
5. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment and
attachment to structural members.
6. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other
construction that affects this Work.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for during and after installation of this Work.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated, include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
metal plate wall panel and accessory.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation layouts of metal plate wall panels; including
details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
1. Provide distinction between factory-assembled, shop-assembled, and field-assembled
work.
2. Provide details of following items at full scale.
a. Manufacturer's standard sheet metal trims.
b. Components of wall panel construction, anchorage methods, and hardware.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Submit exterior elevations, drawn to scale, that have the following
items shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of these items as
follows:
1. Metal plate wall panels and attachments.
2. Girts.
3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
07 4230-3
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
E.
Samples: Submit for each type of exposed finish required, and prepared on samples of size as
follows:
1. Aluminum Metal Plate Wall Panels: At least 2 inch by 3 inch.
F.
Test and Inspection Reports: Submit test and inspection reports on each type of wall panel
system provided for project based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified
testing agency.
G.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for metal plate wall panels.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
I.
Sustainable Design Submittals [LEED Reports]:
1. Submit documentation from manufacturer for amounts of pre-consumer and
post-consumer recycled content for products specified, and include statement indicating
costs for materials having recycled content.
2. Submit documentation providing location of manufacturing.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with at least five years of documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section and approved by
manufacturer.
1. Install system in strict compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal plate wall panel from single source and from
single manufacturer.
1.08 MOCKUPS
A.
Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to establish quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall panel assembly [as shown on Drawings] <insert size>,
including [corner,] [soffits,] supports, attachments, and accessories.
a. Include at least four panels to represent a four-way panel joint and showing full
thickness.
2. Water Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup metal panel assembly, test water
penetration in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviation from Contract Documents
within mockups unless these deviations are approved by Architect in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups [may] or [may not] become
part of completed Work if undisturbed upon date of Substantial Completion.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage and Handling: Store materials in clean, dry, interior area in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Deliver panels, components, and other manufactured items without damage or deformation.
D.
Protect panels during transportation, handling, and installation from weather, excessive
temperatures and construction operations.
E.
Handle panels in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and
in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
1. Store panels vertically with top of panel down, storage of panels horizontally is not
permitted.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-4
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
F.
Store panels covered with suitable weather tight and ventilated covering.
G.
Provide storage of panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of moisture.
H.
Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.
I.
Remove strippable protective covering from aluminum panel prior to installation.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of this Work to be performed according to manufacturer's
installation instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Coordinate with construction schedule.
1.11 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Wall System Warranty: Provide wall panel manufacturer warranty, agreeing to correct defects
in manufacturing of materials within a one year period after date of Substantial Completion.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration: Beyond normal weathering of wall system metals and other materials.
C.
Panel Finish Warranty: Provide panel finish manufacturer warranty, agreeing to repair finish of
metal plate wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: [
] years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Coverage: In accordance with AAMA 2605 for 70 percent PVDF resin on
aluminum finish requirements.
a. Fading, Loss of Color Retention: Loss of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) or less in
accordance with ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking, Chalky White Powder on Panel Surface: Chalking at No. 8 or less for
colors or No. 6 for white in accordance with ASTM D 4214.
c. Loss of Adhesion: Loss of 10 percent due to cracking, checking or peeling, or failure
to adhere to bare metal.
d. Gloss Retention: 50 percent or less in accordance with ASTM D 523.
e. Salt Spray, Accelerated: At least 4,000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117.
f.
Humidity Testing, Accelerated: At least 4,000 hours in accordance with ASTM D
2247.
3. Warranty Coverage: In accordance with AAMA 611 Class 1 anodized aluminum finish
requirements.
a. Loss of Adhesion: Resists cracking, crazing, flaking, and blistering when forming and
welding completed prior to finishing; post forming or welding voids warranty.
b. Fading, Loss of Color Retention: Loss of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) or less in
accordance with ASTM D 2244.
c. Chalking, Chalky White Powder on Panel Surface: Chalking at No. 8 or less in
accordance with ASTM D 4214.
d. Salt Spray, Accelerated: At least 3,000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A.
Dri-Design - Aluminum Wall Panel System; Product Texture Series.
1. Address: 12480 Superior Ct., Holland, Michigan 49424.
2. P.O. Box 1286 Holland, Michigan 49422-1286.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
07 4230-5
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
Phone: (616) 355-2970; Fax: (616) 355-2972; Website: www.dri-design.com.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Textured Series System: Consists of a standard aluminum wall panel with 2 1/2 by 2 1/2 inch
perforated and corrugated face panel fixed to it with an overall 6 inch, nominal, panel depth.
B.
Metal Plate Wall Panel Assemblies: Comply with performance requirements without failure due
to defective manufacturing, fabrication, installation, or other construction defects.
C.
Design, fabricate, and erect a dry joint, pressure equalized rainscreen aluminum textured wall
panel system without use of sealants, gaskets, or butyl tape, tested as installed in compliance
with AAMA 508, and as follows.
1. Pressure Equalization Cycling: Pass cycled pressure loading from 5 psf to 25 psf for 100
three-second cycles at 0.08 seconds or less; ASTM E 1233.
2. Air Infiltration: 0.12 cfm per sf of wall area, tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) in accordance with
ASTM E 283.
a. Maintain air/water barrier leakage rate at 0.11 to 0.13 cfm per sf at 1.57 psf when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 in compliance with AAMA 508 criteria.
3. Water Penetration:
a. Static: Pass water penetration test under static pressure when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 331 at a differential of 10 percent of inward acting design load, with 15
psf pressure differences for at least 15 minutes with 5 gal per sf per hour of water
applied.
b. Dynamic: Pass water penetration test under dynamic pressure of 6.24 psf in
accordance with AAMA 501.1.
4. Structural: Provide systems tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 and certified to be
without permanent deformation or failure of structural members.
D.
High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ): Comply with ASTM E 8 test methods and performance
requirements of Florida Building Code and Miami-Dade County test protocols TAS-202 and
TAS-203 for HVHZ with at least plus 61 psf to minus 80 psf design pressure rating.
1. Application: For aluminum plate thickness of 0.080 inch only.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Plate: Alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for application and in
compliance with manufacturers design requirements.
1. Aluminum Material: Tension-leveled, [flouropolymer PVDF painted finish 3003-H14
manganese alloy] or [anodized finish 5005-AQ manganese alloy].
2. Wall Panel Thickness: 0.080 inch.
3. Thickness of Perforated/Corrugated Face Panel: Range of 0.040 to 0.062 inches.
4. Weight: Less than 4 lbs per sf.
5. Finish: [Two-Coat Fluoropolymer] [Three-Coat Fluoropolymer] [Four-Coat Fluoropolymer]
[Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer] [Clear Anodized Finish] or [Color Anodized Finish].
B.
Panel Depth: 6 inch, nominal.
C.
Panel Size: As indicated on Drawings.
D.
Panel Joints: 1/8 inch.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and finish wall panels within manufacturer's facilities and fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.
1. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
2.05 FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's - Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products, for
recommendations of designating finishes.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-6
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
B.
Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin system.
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' installation
instructions.
2. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
installation instructions.
3. Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica
flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,
pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' installation instructions.
4. Four-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat and clear coats. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
installation instructions.
C.
Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.
1. Color: [ ] or [As selected by Architect].
D.
Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.
E.
Field Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal
plate wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, flashings,
and similar items. Match material and finish of panels unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Provide integral drainage system and manufactures standard extrusions at termination of
dissimilar materials.
C.
Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent wall panels.
1. Thickness: At least 0.040 inch.
2. Refer to Section 07 6200.
D.
Panel Fasteners: Designed to withstand design loads, with at least 7/16 inch diameter head
and neoprene washer.
1. Aluminum Wall Panel Material: Stainless steel fasteners.
E.
Sub-Girts: Galvanized, provide size and gage in accordance with project requirements.
1. Furring Channel: Provide Hat, C, U or Z type as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Flat Strap: At least 14 gage thick.
3. Refer to Section 05 4000.
F.
Substrate Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I, at least 5/8 inch thick.
1. Refer to Drawings and Section 06 1000 for requirements.
G.
Weather Barriers: Provide climate specific weather barrier with performance characteristics for
air penetration, water vapor transmission, and water penetration resistance.
1. Refer to Section 07 2500 for requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, and Work areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of this Work.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-7
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
B.
Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural wall panel
support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
wall panel manufacturer.
C.
Verify that weather barrier has been installed over sheathing or substrate to prevent air
infiltration or water penetration.
D.
Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating wall panels to coordinate actual
penetration locations relative to wall panel joint locations prior to installation.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-girt, base angles, sills, furring, and other wall panel support
members and provide anchorage in accordance with ASTM C 754 for gypsum panel type
substrates and panel manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, including pressure
equalized rainscreen installation method and installation guidelines.
1. Wall panels consist of single sheets of metal formed with interlocking gutter and drainage
system integral to the panel with single horizontal attachment for dry-joint rainscreen
assembly.
2. Use of secondary drainage channels, brackets, support pins, joint sealants or gaskets to
manage the drainage of wall panel system is not permitted.
3. Attach wall panels using progressive interlocking method, engaging bottom of panel in top
of previous panel working bottom up, and left to right.
4. Install wall panels with single top attachment in pre-punched holes to allow individual
panels to move due to thermal expansion.
5. Do not compromise internal gutter.
B.
Install wall panels for orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Install wall panels with proper anchorage and other components for this Work securely in place.
D.
Install wall panels with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
E.
Install shims to plumb substrates as necessary for installation of wall panels.
F.
Install weather tight seals at perimeter of wall panel openings.
1. Test for proper adhesion on small unexposed area of solid surfacing prior to use.
2. Refer to Section 07 9005.
G.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as
indicated.
2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
3. Install flashing and trim as wall panel Work proceeds.
H.
Install weather tight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
I.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by wall panel manufacturer.
J.
Install attachment system to support wall panels and with provisions to provide a complete
weather tight wall system, including sub girts, extrusions, flashings and trim.
1. Include attachment to supports and trims at locations using dissimilar materials.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints, unless noted otherwise on Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3. Install starter extrusion at base course and at cut panel locations.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 4230-8
TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
???? 2014
K.
Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting and
provisions for thermal expansion, and coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings,
flashings and other accessory items.
L.
Weather Barrier: Install weather barrier behind wall panels and over substrate in accordance
with requirements of Section 07 2500.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Shim and align wall panel units with installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative,
on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] or [Engage] a qualified independent testing agency to
perform field tests and inspections.
B.
Water-Spray Test: After installation and in coordination with Mockup requirements, test area of
assembly [shown on Drawings] [as directed by Architect] or <Insert area> for water penetration
in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.
D.
Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
E.
Perform additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, to verify compliance of
replaced wall panels or necessary additional work with specified requirements.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufacturer.
B.
Upon completion of wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions and dirt.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
B.
Replace wall panels damaged or deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or
similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 5423.10-1
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
SECTION 07 5423.10
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Thermoplastic membrane roofing system, including all components specified.
B.
Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane
manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com.
C.
Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this
specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary
prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of
the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the
project conditions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers associated with roofing and roof insulation.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items
associated with roofing.
C.
Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, and other
flashing-related items.
D.
Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches, vents, and manufactured curbs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2012.
B.
ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient
Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer; 2009.
C.
ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010.
D.
ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic Film and
Sheeting; 2009.
E.
ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet
Roofing; 2011a.
F.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
G.
FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual System; 2007.
H.
FM DS 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; Factory Mutual
System; 2006.
I.
SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;
2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting to
discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty.
1. Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or
affected by the performance of roofing work.
2. Notify Architect well in advance of meeting.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
07 5423.10-2
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of
roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements
and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the
system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing
membrane.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.
D.
Shop Drawings: Provide:
1. The roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all
relevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansion
joints, penetrations, and drains.
E.
Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work.
F.
Installer Qualifications: Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the
specified qualifications.
G.
Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN)
has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer.
H.
Executed Warranty.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following:
1. Current Firestone Master Contractor status.
2. Fully staffed office within 100 miles of the job site.
3. At least five years experience in installing specified system.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
B.
Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.
C.
Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,
scheduling, and inspections.
C.
Warranty: Firestone 15 year Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other
indicated components of the system, for the term indicated.
1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.
2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:
a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.
b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials.
c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials.
d. Damage due to winds up to 100 mph (160 km/h).
3. Not Covered:
a. Damage due to winds in excess of 100 mph (160 km/h).
b. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes.
c. Hail.
d. Intentional damage.
e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.
D.
Insulation Warranty: Separate Firestone ISO 95+ Insulation Warranty with warranty term
coinciding with Red Shield Warranty.
1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
E.
07 5423.10-3
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
Scope of Coverage: Provide replacement for insulation that warps, bows, or is on the
point of causing a roof leak as a result of manufacturing defect.
Metal Roof Edging: Firestone full-system warranty for roof edge system, covering blow-off from
winds up to 150 mph (240 km/h).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN:
www.firestonebpco.com.
1. Roofing systems manufactured by others are acceptable provided the roofing system is
completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions and the manufacturer meets
the following qualifications:
a. Specializing in manufacturing the roofing system to be provided.
b. Able to provide a no dollar limit, single source roof system warranty that is backed by
corporate assets in excess of one billion dollars.
B.
Manufacturer of Insulation: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1. Submit evidence that the proposed substitution complies with the specified requirements.
2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Roofing System: Thermoplastic olefin (TPO) single-ply membrane.
1. Membrane Attachment: Mechanically fastened.
2. Warranty: Full system warranty; Firestone 15 year Red Shield Limited Warranty covering
membrane, roof insulation, and membrane accessories.
3. Comply with applicable local building code requirements.
4. Provide assembly having Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Class A Fire Hazard
Classification.
5. Provide assembly complying with Factory Mutual Corporation (FM) Roof Assembly
Classification, FM DS 1-28 and 1-29, and meeting minimum requirements of FM 1-90 wind
uplift rating.
B.
Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down:
1. Membrane: Thickness as specified.
2. Base Sheet Over Insulation: Mechanically attached.
3. Insulation:
a. Maximum Board Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm); use as many layers as necessary;
stagger joints in adjacent layers.
b. Tapered: Slope as indicated; provide minimum R-value at thinnest point; place
tapered layer on bottom.
c. Total R Value: 25, minimum, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
d. Top Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite; mechanically fastened.
e. Intermediate Layer(s), If Any: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite;
loose-laid, no attachment.
f.
Bottom Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite; mechanically fastened.
g. Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; slope as
indicated.
2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and
ethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D6878, with polyester weft inserted
reinforcement and the following additional characteristics:
1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent, with coating thickness over
reinforcement of 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
07 5423.10-4
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
Puncture Resistance: 265 lbf (1174 N), minimum, when tested in accordance FTM 101C
Method 2031.
Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO by Firestone.
B.
Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing
system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane
manufacturer.
C.
Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge which
eliminates need for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches (457 mm) wide.
D.
Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic
polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber.
1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.
2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D638 after heat aging.
3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638
after heat aging.
4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1004
after heat aging.
5. Color: White.
6. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO Flashing by Firestone.
E.
Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber
polymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal; TPO QuickSeam
Flashing by Firestone.
F.
Bonding Adhesive: Neoprene and SBR rubber blend, formulated for compatibility with the
membrane other substrate materials, including masonry, wood, and insulation facings; UltraPly
Bonding Adhesive by Firestone.
G.
Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by
Firestone.
H.
Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM
4470.
I.
Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches (33 mm) wide by 0.10
inch (2.5 mm) thick; Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone.
J.
Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed;
UltraPly TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone.
K.
General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPO
General Purpose Sealant by Firestone.
L.
Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety of
flashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Small
and Large Pipe Flashing by Firestone.
M. Roof Walkway Pads: Non-reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch (3 mm) by 30 inches (760
mm) by 40 feet (12.19 m) long with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO Walkway
Pads by Firestone.
2.04 ROOF INSULATION
A.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam with black glass
reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1, with the
following additional characteristics:
1. Thickness: As indicated elsewhere.
2. Size: 48 inches (1220 mm) by 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal.
a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than
48 inches (1220 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm), nominal.
3. R-Value (LTTR):
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
07 5423.10-5
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
a. 1.0 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 6.0, minimum.
b. 1.25 inch (32 mm) Thickness: 7.5, minimum.
c. 1.5 inch (38 mm) Thickness: 9.0, minimum.
d. 1.75 inch (44 mm) Thickness: 10.5, minimum.
e. 2.0 inch (51 mm) Thickness: 12.1, minimum.
f.
3.0 inch (76 mm) Thickness: 18.5, minimum.
g. 4.0 inch (102 mm) Thickness: 25.0, minimum.
Compressive Strength: 20 psi (138 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1289.
Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents.
Recycled Content: 19 percent post-consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average.
Acceptable Product: ISO 95+ GL Polyisocyanurate Insulation by Firestone.
Insulation Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing
system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane
manufacturer.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
A.
Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's
published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where
manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and
industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
B.
Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation
period.
C.
Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification
that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.
D.
Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.
E.
Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the
new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings,
terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight
condition.
F.
Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do
not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow
proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do
not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to
80 degrees F (15 to 25 degrees C).
G.
Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing
work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.
1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings.
2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives,
and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.
3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by
other trades.
H.
Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.
I.
Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and
cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their
mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform
deck.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 5423.10-6
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
B.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the
substrate before commencing with roofing work.
C.
Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.
D.
Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of
project conditions and requirements.
E.
Verify that wood nailers have been properly installed.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the
building through air intakes.
B.
Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp
edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that
may damage the membrane.
C.
Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide with
fill material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer.
D.
Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building.
3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under
Roofing System.
B.
Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the
end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.
C.
Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges.
D.
Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater
than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with acceptable insulation. Do not
leave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm).
E.
Mechanical Fastening: Using specified fasteners and insulation plates engage fasteners
through insulation into deck to depth and in pattern required by Factory Mutual for FM Class
specified in PART 2 and membrane manufacturer, whichever is more stringent.
3.05 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to
relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax
time.
B.
Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water.
C.
Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test
seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details.
D.
Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using seam battens, fasteners, and
edge securement as specified and as required by membrane manufacturers.
E.
Mechanical Attachment: Install fasteners in the seams, covered by membrane.
1. Lay out fasteners in compliance with FM Class specified in PART 2, as recommended by
membrane manufacturer, and as indicated, whichever is most stringent.
2. Properly engage fasteners in the deck with head flush with the countersunk portion of
seam plate.
F.
Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes
through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches (1:6 ) using mechanically fastened
reinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended
by roofing manufacturer.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
07 5423.10-7
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter and
square penetrations less than 4 inches (200 mm) square.
Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by
roofing manufacturer.
3.06 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required
by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.
B.
Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on
the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto
membrane.
1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions.
2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation.
3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg.
4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated.
5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install
additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.
6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the
metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the metal
lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the two
flashing sections.
7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edge
of the flashing.
C.
Scuppers: Set in sealant and secure to structure; flash as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Roofing Expansion Joints: Install as shown on drawings and as recommended by roofing
manufacturer.
E.
Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing
at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the
roofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches (200 mm) high above membrane
surface.
1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces.
2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with
membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice
adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface.
4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings.
F.
Roof Drains:
1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use
specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to
achieve slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12 to 19 mm) of
membrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts.
3. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to
bolt holes.
4. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane
5. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve
constant compression.
G.
Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing
seals directly to the penetration.
1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe flashings
wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
07 5423.10-8
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL
???? 2014
Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2
inches (50 mm) deep, with at least 1 inch (25 mm) clearance from penetration, sloped to
shed water.
Structural Steel Tubing: If corner radii are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and longest side of
tube does not exceed 12 inches (305 mm), flash as for pipes; otherwise, provide a
standard curb with flashing.
Flexible and Moving Penetrations: Provide weathertight gooseneck set in sealant and
secured to deck, flashed as recommended by manufacturer.
High Temperature Surfaces: Where the in-service temperature is, or is expected to be, in
excess of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C), protect the elastomeric components from direct
contact with the hot surfaces using an intermediate insulated sleeve as flashing substrate
as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3.07 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require
maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings.
B.
Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch (25
mm) and maximum of 3.0 inches (75 mm) from each other to allow for drainage.
1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches (150 mm) of a
splice edge cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice and
extending beyond the walkway pad a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on either side.
2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk on
pad to ensure proper adhesion.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical
Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for
warranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).
B.
Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.
3.09 CLEANING
A.
Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas,
including bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings.
B.
Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the
work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and
surfaces.
C.
Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.
3.10 PROTECTION
A.
Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable
protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 6200-1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
???? 2014
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, sheet
metal roofing, and other items indicated in Schedule.
B.
Reglets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.
B.
Section 07 5423 - Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing (TPO): Roofing system.
C.
Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing.
D.
Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Preformed flashings and manufactured expansion joint
covers.
E.
Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units.
F.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
C.
AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
F.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
G.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
H.
ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products;
2003 (Reapproved 2009).
I.
ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; 2013a.
J.
ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
K.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 8 inch x 8 inch inch (8 inch x 8 inch mm) in size illustrating metal
finish color.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 6200-2
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
???? 2014
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and CDA Copper
in Architecture Handbook requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick; plain finish
shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.
1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;
baked enamel finish system.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
B.
Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft (0.99 mm) thick.
C.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick; smooth No. 4
finish.
D.
Asphalt Coated Copper Fabric (Masonry Thru-Wall Flashing): ASTM B370, width as shown in
drawings, 5 oz.
1. Accessories as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Basis of Design: Hohman & Barnard, Inc., C-Coat Flashing, with stainless steel
termination bar.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Underlayment: ASTM D2178, glass fiber roofing felt.
C.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
D.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
E.
Sealant: Type ____ specified in Section 07 9005.
F.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
G.
Reglets: Recessed, surface mounted, as indicated type, galvanized steel; face and ends
covered with plastic tape .
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 6 inches wide, interlocking with sheet.
C.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.
E.
Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
F.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity,
seal with sealant.
G.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
drip.
H.
Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing membrane. Return
and brake edges.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 6200-3
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
???? 2014
2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A.
Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile.
B.
Downspout Boots: Steel.
C.
Seal metal joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
D.
Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
E.
Slope gutters 1/4 inch per 10 feet (2.1 mm per m), minimum.
F.
Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.
B.
Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
3.05 SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 7100-1
ROOF SPECIALTIES
???? 2014
SECTION 07 7100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured roof specialties, including copings, fascias, gravel stops, and vents.
B.
Roof control and expansion joint covers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs, roof hatches, and snow guards.
B.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
C.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
D.
ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
E.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
F.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
G.
SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;
Single Ply Roofing Industry; 2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and
locations.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction,
required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work.
D.
Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of coping and gravel stop.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Roof Edge Flashings and Copings:
1. Architectural Products Co: www.archprod.com.
2. W.P. Hickman Company: www.wph.com.
3. Metal-Era Inc: www.metalera.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Pipe and Penetration Flashings:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
07 7100-2
ROOF SPECIALTIES
???? 2014
Portals Plus by Commercial Products Group of Hart and Cooley, Inc.:
www.portalsplus.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed
fasteners.
1. Configuration: Fascia, cant, and edge securement for roof membrane;
2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and
negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.
3. Material: Extruded aluminum, 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick, minimum.
4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.
5. Finish: Anodized natural (clear).
6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Products:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; Extruded TerminEdge: www.wph.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.
1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at
joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.
2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative
design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.
3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, minimum.
4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.
5. Finish: Anodized natural (clear).
6. Color: As shown on drawings.
7. Products:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Aluminum construction, designed for joint width shown on
the drawings. Include special formed corners, tees, intersections and wall flashings, each
sealed watertight.
D.
Pipe and Penetration Flashing: Base of rounded aluminum, compatible with sheet metal roof
systems, and capable of accomodating pipes sized between 0.375 inches (9.5 mm) and 12
inches (30.5 cm).
1. Color: As shown on drawings.
E.
Engineered Roof Perimeter Blocking: Prefabricated 20 gage, 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) galvanized
steel retainer for lightweight concrete; with cleat to accept copings; attach to roof deck in lieu of
wood blocking at roof edge; for low slope roof installations.
1. Style: Box.
2. Product:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; EdgeBox: www.wph.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
2.04 FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.
B.
PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;
multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 7100-3
ROOF SPECIALTIES
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this
Section are in place and positioned correctly.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashings.
C.
Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water
tightness.
D.
Coordinate installation of flashing flanges into reglets.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 7200-1
ROOF ACCESSORIES
???? 2014
SECTION 07 7200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals.
B.
Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet
metal.
C.
Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Other manufactured roof items.
D.
Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this
project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS
A.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
1. AES Industries Inc.: www.aescurb.com.
2. The Pate Company: www.patecurbs.com.
3. Roof Products & Systems (RPS) by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc:
www.rpscurbs.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
Factory-assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners,
integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.
1. Sheet Metal: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, SS
Grade 33 (230); G60 (Z180) coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) thick.
2. Roofing Cants: Provide integral sheet metal roofing cants dimensioned to begin slope at
top of roofing insulation; 1:1 slope; minimum cant height 4 inches (200 mm).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
4.
07 7200-2
ROOF ACCESSORIES
???? 2014
Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on
insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.
Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings.
C.
Curbs Adjacent to Roof Openings: Provide curb on all sides of opening, with top of curb
horizontal for equipment mounting.
1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of curb.
2. Insulate inside curbs with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) thick fiberglass insulation.
3. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.
4. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.
D.
Equipment Rails: Two-sided curbs in straight lengths, with top horizontal for equipment
mounting.
1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of rails.
2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.
3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.
E.
Pipe, Duct, and Conduit Mounting Pedestals: Vertical posts, minimum 8 inches (400 mm)
square unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide sliding channel welded along top edge with adjustable height steel bracket,
manufactured to fit item supported.
2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.
3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A.
Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:
1. Acudor Products Inc; Aluminum Roof Hatch: www.acudor.com.
2. Bilco Company; Type S (ladder access, standard size, solid cover): www.bilco.com.
3. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com.
4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release
hardware.
1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck.
3. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf.
4. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 36 inches (762 by 914 mm).
5. For Ships Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 54 inches (762 by 1372 mm).
6. For Stair Access: Single leaf; 30 by 96 inches (762 by 2438 mm).
C.
Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick.
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.
3. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb.
4. Curb Height: 12 inches (305 mm) from finished surface of roof, minimum.
D.
Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.
1. Capable of supporting 40 psf (1.92 kPa) live load.
2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, liner 22
gage, 0.03 inch (0.76 mm) thick.
3. Finish: Factory prime paint.
4. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber.
5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.
E.
Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
07 7200-3
ROOF ACCESSORIES
???? 2014
Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf (475
kPa) load.
Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
2.03 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Non-Penetrating Rooftop Assemblies: Manufacturer-engineered and factory-fabricated, with
pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof
structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly.
1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes.
2. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent
indentation of roofing assembly.
3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
4. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed work to like-new condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 8400-1
FIRESTOPPING
???? 2014
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Firestopping systems.
B.
Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant
assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.
B.
Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing.
C.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a.
B.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved
2011).
C.
ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2010.
D.
ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Continuity
Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal
Assemblies; 2011.
E.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
F.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
G.
UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
H.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,
and firestopping test or design number.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock
Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. Trained by the manufacturer.
2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.
3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.
4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 8400-2
FIRESTOPPING
???? 2014
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.
5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
C.
Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for
tested assembly design.
D.
Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to
ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the floor assembly.
1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating
as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as
indicated.
B.
Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall: Use any
system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to
required fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater.
C.
Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are
Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to
have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint
occurs.
1. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as
indicated.
2. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as
indicated.
3. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of
successful testing.
D.
Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM
E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.
1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating
as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as
indicated.
3. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of
successful testing.
2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 8400-3
FIRESTOPPING
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B.
Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Install labeling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 9005-1
JOINT SEALERS
???? 2014
SECTION 07 9005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and
vapor retarders:
B.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
C.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
D.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
E.
Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
E.
ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded
Rubber; 2007.
F.
ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
G.
ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005
(Reapproved 2010).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, and color availability.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
07 9005-2
JOINT SEALERS
???? 2014
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
3. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.
4. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
6. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
8. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:
1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com.
2. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M,
G, and A; single component.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
3. Polyurethane Products:
a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II General Purpose Two Part Polyurethane Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.
c. Products:
1) Pecora BA-98
2) Tremco Trempro JS 773
C.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF
single component, paintable.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
3. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound:
www.pecora.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
b.
c.
d.
07 9005-3
JOINT SEALERS
???? 2014
BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Type ___ - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations:
1. Composition: Permanently tacky non-hardening butyl sealant.
2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
3. Products:
a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
c. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
d. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M
and A; single component.
1. Color: Gray.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.
3. Products:
a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
b. Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
F.
Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, I, M, A, O; single
component, chemical curing, non staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water
immersion, self-leveling type.
1. Color: Color as selected.
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F (-40 to 82 degrees C).
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.
5. Applications: Use for:
a. Horizontal Traffic Bearing Joints.
6. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
b. Vulkem 245.
c. Tremco Inc., THC-900/THC-901.
d. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL-2
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component,
solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.
5. Applications: Use for:
a. Composite metal panel joints.
b. Storefront, curtainwall, door exterior joints.
6. Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795: www.dowcorning.com.
b. Pecora Corporation; 895: www.pecora.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
c.
d.
H.
07 9005-4
JOINT SEALERS
???? 2014
Tremco Global Sealants; SpecTrem 2: www.tremcosealants.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T,NT, A, G, M, O; single
component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.
5. Applications: Use for:
a. EIFS joints.
6. Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790: www.dowcorning.com.
b. Pecora Corporation; 890: www.pecora.com.
c. Tremco Global Sealants; SpecTrem 1: www.tremcosealants.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
I.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Tool joints concave.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
07 9005-5
JOINT SEALERS
???? 2014
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 1113-1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
???? 2014
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B.
Steel frames for wood doors.
C.
Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
D.
Thermally insulated steel doors.
E.
Steel glazing frames.
F.
Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003 (R2008).
C.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011).
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011.
F.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
G.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
H.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
I.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
J.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced grade standard.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 1113-2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
???? 2014
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; Product ____: www.allegion.com/us.
4. Technical Glass Products; SteelBuilt Window & Door Systems: www.tgpamerica.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings.
6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A.
Exterior Doors :
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
B.
Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm).
C.
Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C
("positive pressure").
a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness for exit Doors: 250 F degrees (138
C degrees).
b. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
c. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
D.
08 1113-3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
???? 2014
Core: Mineral fiberboard.
Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.
2.04 STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.
b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames.
c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8
for Level 1, 16 gage
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100
mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into
frame head, flush with top.
B.
Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
D.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
E.
Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match
door frames, and as indicated on drawings.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;
factory-installed.
1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
2. Style: Standard straight slat blade.
3. Louver Free Area: 50 percent.
4. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.
C.
Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted
corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
D.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
E.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 1113-4
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
???? 2014
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 1416-1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
???? 2014
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.
B.
Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
E.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
B.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
C.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
D.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
E.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2005.
F.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
G.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
H.
WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers
Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,
blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
D.
Specimen warranty.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
F.
Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and
finishing.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
C.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
08 1416-2
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
???? 2014
Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and
products meet the specified requirements.
Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated
class as indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
2. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.
3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
4. Oshkosh Architectural Door .
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors:
1. Ampco Products, Inc: www.ampco.com.
2. Poncraft Door Co: www.poncraft.com.
3. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural
Woodwork Standards.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Exterior Doors: Flush solid core construction.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations .
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International
Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when
door is open.
3. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish where indicated on drawings.
4. Wood veneer facing for field opaque finish where indicated on drawings.
5. High pressure decorative laminate finish where indicated on drawings.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 1416-3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
???? 2014
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type framed non-bonded particleboard
core (FPC), plies and faces as indicated above.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core
blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
C.
Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: species as indicated in the drawings, veneer
grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly
match; unless otherwise indicated.
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet (3 m) of each other when doors
are closed.
3. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.
B.
Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlaid plywood.
C.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Fire Doors: NEMA LD 3, SGF; color(s) as
indicated; textured, low gloss finish.
D.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: NEMA LD 3, HGS;
color(s) as indicated; textured, low gloss finish.
E.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
C.
At exterior doors, provide aluminum flashing at the top and bottom rail and the sill of glazed
openings for full thickness and width of door.
D.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
E.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
F.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5
- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 5, Varnish, Conversion.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Satin.
B.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
08 1416-4
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
???? 2014
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
F.
Install door louvers plumb and level.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3013-1
HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOOR
???? 2014
SECTION 08 3013
HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
RYTEC- High-Speed Roll-up Doors
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
C.
Purchasing Account: The Owner has a national account with Rytec. The Contractor will contact
Rytec and include in the Contractors cost the actual Owner's negotiated price for the RYTEC
doors. If the Owner has negotiated a longer warranty, the Contractor will include the longer
Warranty in the project.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 4000: Support framing.
B.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
B.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
D.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005).
E.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D.
Samples: Submit two slats, 6x12 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating shape, color and
finish texture.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and
alignment procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
High Speed Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. Rytec Corporation.
a. Sprial for non hurricane zones
b. Sprial HZ for hurricane zones.
c. Spiral FV where indicated on drawings
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
08 3013-2
HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOOR
???? 2014
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOORS
A.
Exterior Coiling Doors: Aluminum slat curtain.
1. Door Panel:
a. Double walled aluminum slats.
b. Nominal Slat Size: 6"x1 3/16"x required length.
c. Weather Seal: Integral rubber between each panel.
2. Sprial Door:
a. Provide eight clear vision slats, bottom vision panel located approximately 48" above
floor subject to manufacturer's requirements.
3. Side Frames: Galvanized steel side frames with full height weatherseal on both sides to
seal against door panel.
4. Botttom Bar: Extruded aluminum bottom bar with electric reversing edge. Door reverses
direction upon contact with any object.
a. Provide dfual thru-beam photo-eye.
5. Counterbalance: Manufacturer's recommended number of extension springs in each side
column. Mechanical release lever on side column allowing door to be operated in a power
failure. No exterior mounted coil cord.
6. Drive System: 2 HP 209, 230/460 Volt, three phase motor with variable speed AC drive to
allow soft acceleration and braking.
7. Travel Speed: Open; 60 inches per second. Close; 30 inches per second.
8. Electrical Controls: AC drive system with self-diagnostic capability and pre-programmed
menu options housed in a NEMA 4 electrical enclusre with vision window. Includes cycle
counter and 2 digit display and self adjusting limit switches. Control Panel to be fully
assembled, wired and tested at factory.
9. Manufacturer's standard factory finish on all components.
a. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), without
undue deflection or damage to components.
b. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
prevent lateral movement.
2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed
position.
3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.
B.
Aluminum Slats: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), aluminum alloy Type 6063, minimum thickness
________.
C.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting
brackets of same metal.
D.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
E.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force to
operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Electric Operators:
1. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp (250 W); continuous duty.
2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
3. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
5.
6.
08 3013-3
HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOOR
???? 2014
Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).
Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
Manual override in case of power failure.
B.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
C.
Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.
F.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3100-1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
???? 2014
SECTION 08 3100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall access door and frame units.
B.
Ceiling access door and frame units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
B.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS
A.
Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Standard duty, hinged door.
4. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.
B.
Walls in Wet Areas:
1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Standard duty, hinged door.
3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.
C.
Fire Rated Walls: See drawings for wall fire ratings.
1. Material: Steel.
2. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Uninsulated, single thickness door panel.
D.
Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls.
1. Material: Steel.
2. Size in Lay-in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module.
3. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Standard duty, hinged door.
2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
2. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com.
3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.
4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
08 3100-2
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
???? 2014
Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints
welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with
assemblies units are to be installed in.
1. Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface.
2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.
3. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm), minimum.
4. Double-Skinned Hollow Steel Door Panels: 16 gage, 0.059 inch (1.52 mm), minimum, on
both sides and all edges.
5. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for the fire rated
assembly in which they are to be installed.
6. Steel Finish: Primed.
7. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color.
8. Size(s): As indicated.
9. Hardware:
a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing.
b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3323-1
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
???? 2014
SECTION 08 3323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Overhead coiling doors and shutters, operating hardware, fire-rated, non-fire-rated, and exterior,
manual and electric operation.
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 3326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles.
B.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
C.
Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm interconnection.
D.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
E.
Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control
station.
F.
Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from fire alarm system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
D.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
E.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
F.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).
G.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
H.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
I.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
J.
UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3323-2
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
???? 2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. Overhead Door Company, Inc .
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 COILING DOORS
A.
Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain at non conditioned interior.
1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), without
undue deflection or damage to components.
2. Product: Overhead Door Model: Rolling Service 620
3. Single thickness slats. (At non conditioned spaces)
4. Sandwich slat construction with insulated core of closed cell type insulation; insulation (u-)
value: 0.50 BTU/hr sq ft deg F (2.84 W/sq m deg K)(At conditioned interior spaces)
5. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wide x required length.
6. Finish: Factory painted, Gray color.
7. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.
8. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".
9. Operation: See drawings and schedules.
10. Mounting: As indicated.
B.
Non-Fire-Rated Interior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.
1. Single thickness slats.
2. Product: Overhead Door Company; Model Rolling Service 610
3. Finish: Factory painted, Gray color.
4. Guides: Angles; primed steel.
5. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".
6. Operation: See drawings and schedules
7. Mounting: Surface mounted.
8. Interior latch only.
C.
Fire-Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80.
1. 1-1/2 hour fire rating.
2. Product: Overhead Door Company; Model Rolling Service 630 with Fire Minuteman reset
feature.
3. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
4. Oversized Openings: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of fire rated units and operating hardware assembly.
5. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wide x required length.
6. Finish: Factory painted, grey color.
7. Guides: Angles; primed steel.
8. Frame Sill: Angles; Steel angle sill for doors not closing to floor.
9. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".
10. Release Mechanism: Fire alarm system activated with automatically governed closing
speed.
11. Electric operation.
12. Mounting: Surface mounted.
13. Interior latch only.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
prevent lateral movement.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
08 3323-3
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
???? 2014
Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed
position.
Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.
B.
Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place , mounting brackets of same
metal.
D.
Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 16 gage; 3 inch wide; complying with ASTM
A653/A653M.
1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.
2. Prime paint.
E.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
1. Prime paint.
F.
Hardware:
1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to
keep in locked or retracted position with provision for padlocks (padlocks by owner).
G.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force to
operate, counterbalance in steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting curtain with defelction limited to
0.03 inch per for of span..
1. Life cycles: Operating components and systems shall have a minimum life expectancy of
100,000 cycles for exterior non-rated doors and 20,000 cycles for fire rated doors.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Electric Operators:
1. Model: High cycle or large doors; Overhead Door Company Model RDB.
2. Model: Low cycle (20,000 cycles or less): Overhead Door Company Model RG.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Motor Enclosure:
a. Exterior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 4; open drip proof.
b. Interior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.
5. Motor Rating: 1/2 hp (375 W); continuous duty.
6. Motor Voltage: See Electrical Drawings.
7. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
8. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
9. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).
10. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
11. Manual override in case of power failure.
C.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted (CMU or Concrete), Recessed (Metal Stud)
D.
Safety Edge: Low cycle Doors; Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical
sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
E.
Safety Edge: High cycle doors; Provide photo-electric safety device.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3323-4
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
In addition, install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
D.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
E.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
F.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.
G.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
H.
Complete wiring from fire alarm system.
I.
Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07 9005.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3326-1
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
???? 2014
SECTION 08 3326
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, manual and electric operation.
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors.
B.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys.
C.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
D.
Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control
station.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
B.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
D.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 V; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).
E.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
F.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Overhead Coiling Grilles:
1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc: www.alpinedoors.com.
2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com.
3. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.
4. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.waynedalton.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTS
A.
Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
08 3326-2
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
???? 2014
Finish: No. 4.
Finish: Anodized, color as selected.
Lock: Inside cylinder lock.
Electric operation.
Mounting: Within framed opening.
B.
Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links.
1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter.
2. Bar spacing: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) on center.
3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter.
4. Spacer spacing: 3 1/4 inch (81 mm) on center.
5. Vertical links: 5/8 x 1/8 inch (16 x 3 mm) flat bar.
6. Link spacing: 6 inch (150 mm) on center.
7. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation.
8. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion.
C.
Guides: Extruded aluminum angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap-on trim,
mounting brackets of same metal.
D.
Hood Enclosure: Sheet metal; completely covering operating mechanisms; internally reinforced
to maintain rigidity and shape, no "decals".
1. Material: Same metal as grille.
2. Finish: No. 4.
E.
Hardware:
1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 7100.
2. Latch Handle: Interior handle.
F.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force to
operate.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Electric Operators:
1. Mounting: Side mounted.
2. Motor Enclosure:
a. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.
3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp (250 W); continuous duty.
4. Motor Voltage: 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.
5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
7. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).
8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
9. Manual override in case of power failure.
B.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted.
C.
Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 3326-3
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.
F.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean grille and components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 4413-1
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
???? 2014
SECTION 08 4413
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass and metal infill panels.
B.
Perimeter sealant.
C.
Firestopping between curtain wall and edge of floor slab.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Weld plates embedded in concrete for attachment
of anchors.
B.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.
C.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
D.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and
adjacent construction.
E.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
F.
Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Entrance framing and doors.
G.
Section 08 4229 - Automatic Entrances.
H.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
I.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud and gypsum board wall at interior of
curtain wall.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
C.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
D.
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers; 2011.
E.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
F.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
G.
ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2010.
H.
ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2013.
I.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
J.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 4413-2
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
???? 2014
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal drainage details and ________.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,
glazing, infill panels, glazing materials.
E.
Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of tests previously
performed on the same design are acceptable.
F.
Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering
calculations, and identify dimensional limitations; include load calculations at points of
attachment to building structure.
G.
Report of field testing for water leakage.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
B.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).
Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN
A.
Pressure Cap Four Sides; Not Unitized, Field Assembled.
1. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America, Series 1600, System 1, 2-1/4 inch (61 mm)
wide face.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall:
1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
08 4413-3
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
???? 2014
Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope: www.oldcastlebe.com.
United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.
YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.03 CURTAIN WALL
A.
Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing
members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Finish: Class I natural anodized.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and
secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;
reinforced as required for imposed loads.
3. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration
harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
B.
Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the following
load requirements without damage or permanent set.
1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the requirements of the applicable code.
a. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test
loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum
pressure.
2. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway
displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.
3. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or
deterioration of seals:
a. Expansion and contraction caused by 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) surface
temperature.
b. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95
degrees C) over a 12 hour period.
c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.
d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.
C.
Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on indoor face when tested as follows:
1. Test Pressure Differential: 10 lbf/sq ft (480 Pa).
D.
Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft (0.3 L/s/sq m) of wall area, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot (300 Pa) pressure differential
across assembly.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep
drainage system.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.
2.05 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel; type as required or recommended by curtain wall manufacturer.
C.
Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing
members.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 4413-4
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
???? 2014
D.
Structural Glazing Adhesive: Silicone, neutral cure; formulated specifically for structural sealant
glazing and complying with ASTM C1184.
1. Ultraviolet radiation resistant for 2000 to 4000 micro-watts minimum for 21 days.
2. Adhesion when subjected to ultraviolet radiation through glass in accordance with ASTM
C794 without failure.
3. Minimum adhesion tensile strength of 100 psi (690 kPa).
4. Tested for compatibility with glazing accessories and weatherseal sealant.
E.
Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive.
F.
Perimeter Sealant: Type scheduled and specified in Section 07 9005.
G.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
H.
Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.
2.06 FINISHES
A.
Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA
612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils
(0.018 mm) thick.
B.
Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or
AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited
organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
C.
Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F.
Install sill, head, and eave edge flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to
form water tight dam.
G.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
H.
Structural Adhesive Glazing: Install glazing adhesive and weatherseal sealant in accordance
with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.
I.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005.
J.
Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or 0.5
inches per 100 ft (12 mm/30 m), whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
08 4413-5
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
???? 2014
Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch
(19 mm) and minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B.
Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
C.
Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until performance is
satisfactory.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating sash for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 7100-1
DOOR HARDWARE
???? 2014
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors.
B.
Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C.
Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D.
Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.
E.
Thresholds.
F.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.
C.
Section 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Lockable coiling doors.
D.
Section 08 3326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles: Lockable coiling grilles.
E.
Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of
cylinders.
F.
Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including:
1. Integral weatherstripping.
2. Narrow stile locks.
3. Closers.
4. Installation of lock cylinders provided under this section.
G.
Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders;
installation of cylinders.
H.
Section 28 3105 - Fire Alarm System Equipment: Electrical connection to activate door closers.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
C.
BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
D.
BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).
E.
BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).
F.
BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).
G.
DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.
H.
DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;
Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 7100-2
DOOR HARDWARE
???? 2014
I.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
J.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B.
Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
C.
Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use
door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated
items and include power requirements.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and
inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
E.
Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
G.
Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special
hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for
use by Architect and Contractor.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door
hardware with three years of experience.
D.
Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in
the work of this section.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide ten year warranty for door closers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A.
Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B.
Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 7100-3
DOOR HARDWARE
???? 2014
C.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
6. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
D.
Finishes:
1. Hinges on metal doors shall be primed.
2. Hinges on wood doors shall match finish of adjacent hardware.
3. Storefront hardware;
a. Clear anodized storefront: Brushed chrome.
b. Color anodized storefront: Oil rubbed bronze.
4. Except as noted Primary finish: Brushed Chrome.
2.02 HINGES
A.
Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.
3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.
5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.
B.
Quantity of Hinges Per Door:
1. Doors From 60 inches (1.5 m) High up to 90 inches (2.3 m) High: Three hinges.
2. Doors 90 inches (2.3 m) High up to 120 inches (3 m) High: Four hinges.
2.03 PUSH/PULLS
A.
Push/Pulls/Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Profile: Square Corner.
2. Push plate size: 6 x 16 inches
3. Pull plate size: 4 x 16 inches
4. Pulls: one inch diameter with 8 inch centers
5. Kickplate height: 12 inches
2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no outside trim.
4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no locking or no outside trim.
B.
Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.
1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.
C.
Keying: Grand master keyed.
1. Include construction keying.
2. Key to existing keying system (for additions only).
3. Supply keys in the following quantities:
a. 5 master keys.
b. 5 grand master keys.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
c.
d.
D.
08 7100-4
DOOR HARDWARE
???? 2014
6 construction keys.
2 change keys for each lock.
Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated
"push/pull" or "not required to latch".
2.05 FLUSHBOLTS
A.
Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of
frame.
1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply
with code.
2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.
B.
Coordinators: Provide on doors having closers and self-latching or automatic flushbolts to
ensure that leaves close in proper order.
2.06 CLOSERS
A.
Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.
1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door.
3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an
acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated.
4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to
ensure the leaves close in proper order.
2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide
overhead stop.
3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature
of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.
2.08 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
A.
Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.
1. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top,
sides, and meeting stiles of pairs.
a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets
functioning as both smoke and weather seals.
2. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Thresholds:
1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Full saddle: Finish floor at same elevation on both sides of door.
b. Half saddle: Finish floor at different elevation on each side of door.
c. No threshold on interior doors with finish floor at same elevation on both sides of the
door.
2. Field cut threshold to frame for tight fit.
C.
Fasteners At Exterior Locations: Non-corroding.
2.09 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A.
Protection Plates:
1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all-glass
doors.
B.
Drip Guard: Provide projecting drip guard over all exterior doors unless they are under a
projecting roof or canopy.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 7100-5
DOOR HARDWARE
???? 2014
2.10 KEY CONTROLS
A.
Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock.
1. Mounting: Wall-mounted.
2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 10 percent additional capacity.
3. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, grey color.
5. Key cabinet lock to building keying system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in
Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."
2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per
manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot
be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 8000-1
GLAZING
???? 2014
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinets with requirements for glass shelves
.
B.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
D.
Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
E.
Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
F.
Section 08 3200 - Sliding Glass Doors: Glazing furnished by door manufacturer.
G.
Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
H.
Section 08 4229 - Automatic Entrances: Glazing furnished as part of door assembly.
I.
Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.
J.
Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Glazing furnished by wall manufacturer.
K.
Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
L.
Section 08 6300 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished by skylight manufacturer.
M. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
E.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
F.
ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.
G.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
H.
ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2012a.
I.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
J.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
K.
GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
L.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 8000-2
GLAZING
???? 2014
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size of glass units.
E.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Insulating Glass Units: One of each glass size and each glass type.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C.
Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads
acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with applicable
code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
B.
Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building
enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
2.03 GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.
2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.
3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.
4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
5.
08 8000-3
GLAZING
???? 2014
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for
wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
C.
Laminated Glass (for skylights, if any): Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.
1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.
2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick, minimum.
3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the
tong-less horizontal method.
4. Manufacturers:
a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.
b. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.
c. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Butyl Sealant : Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore
A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.
C.
Silicone Sealant : Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of
properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,
and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4
inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing
method and pane weight and area.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit
application, self adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper 12x12 inch; black color.
1. Manufacturers:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
a.
b.
c.
08 8000-4
GLAZING
???? 2014
Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option I; black color.
E.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
B.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
C.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 8300-1
MIRRORS
???? 2014
SECTION 08 8300
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass mirrors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood frames for mirrors.
B.
Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
B.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
C.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
D.
ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
E.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
F.
GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004
(http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of
same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored
glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Silicone Sealant : ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single component;
chemical curing; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; black color.
2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 8300-2
MIRRORS
???? 2014
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.
C.
Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
D.
Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive mirrors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime
surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
B.
Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
C.
Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or
backsplashes.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after work is complete.
C.
Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
08 9200-1
LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
???? 2014
SECTION 08 9200
LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Louvered aluminum screens for concealing rooftop equipment.
B.
Fasteners and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Superstructure support and bracing of rooftop screens
and grilles.
B.
Section 07 5432 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing: Treating pentrations for suport of rooftop
screens.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
B.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installation methods.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of connections and bracing.
1. Include structural calculations indicating compliance with wind loading requirements.
2. Show field measurements of roof openings on shop drawings.
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available finishes, colors, and textures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling of grille and screen products.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Submit manufacturer's standard ten-year finish warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SCREENS - GENERAL
A.
Wind Resistance: Design grilles and screens, including superstructure support system, to
withstand positive and negative wind loading in accordance with applicable building code.
2.02 LIGHTWEIGHT PITCHED LOUVERED SCREENS
A.
Construction: Individual roll-formed aluminum blades snapped onto reinforced aluminum
stringers spaced at 24 in (610 mm) on center, which in turn are supported by custom
superstructure.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
08 9200-2
LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
???? 2014
Vertical Stringers: Stamped aluminum members formed into a U-shape in plan, alloy
3003-H25, per ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 2.625 in (66.7 mm) deep, and configured for
22.5 degree louver pitch, allowing 30 percent free air flow.
Louver Blades: Alloy 3005-H26, per ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3.375 in (85.7 mm)
aluminum slats roll-formed into shallow channel shape and designed to snap onto vertical
stringers.
B.
Aluminum Finish: Low gloss polyester enamel paint, roller coated over pretreated aluminum
and baked at 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
C.
Overall Screen Configuration: Dimensions, details, and layout as indicated on the drawings.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Miscellaneous Trim: Aluminum sheet, alloy 3005-H26 or equivalent per ASTM B209 (ASTM
B209M), formed to shapes indicated and finished to match other components.
B.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, as approved by manufacturer of rooftop
equipment screens.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install rooftop equipment screens in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
approved shop drawings.
B.
Form tight joints and fit exposed connections accurately.
C.
Provide all necessary fastenings and anchors required for a complete installation. Install units
plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of
bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.
C.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 2116-1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.
Metal stud wall framing.
C.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
D.
Acoustic insulation.
E.
Gypsum sheathing.
F.
Cementitious backing board.
G.
Gypsum wallboard.
H.
Joint treatment and accessories.
I.
Water-resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.
B.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
C.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
D.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
E.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
F.
Section 09 3000 - Tiling (Tile): Tile backing board.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units; 2013.1.
B.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
C.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2012.
D.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.
E.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
F.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
G.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
H.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness; 2011.
I.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;
2007 (Reapproved 2013).
J.
ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base; 2010a.
K.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing; 2013.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
L.
09 2116-2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2007a
(Reapproved 2011).
M. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.
N.
ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement
Substrate Sheets; 2008b.
O.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.
P.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
Q.
ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
R.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
S.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
T.
GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.
U.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
V.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing
system.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
finishing, with minimum three years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
B.
Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C.
Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft (0.24 kPa) with maximum
mid-span deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
D.
Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft (0.24 kPa) with maximum
mid-span deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
E.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed Assembly; 1 and 2 hour rating.
2. Fire Rated Shaft Walls: Listed Assembly; 1 hour rating hour rating.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
3.
09 2116-3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
Marino: www.marinoware.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf (240 Pa).
1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm).
C.
Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 4000.
D.
Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.
1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
F.
Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as
indicated on drawings.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.
4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for
paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced
board.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;
if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Paper-Faced Products:
a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X
Gypsum Wallboard.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard.
d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.
e. Substitutions: Not permitted.
6. Glass Mat Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Abuse-Resistant.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Interior Panels.
d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Interior Extreme.
e. Substitutions: Not permitted.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 2116-4
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
C.
Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds, shower
ceilings, and food preparation.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels
with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or
ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
b. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; _____: www.custombuildingproducts.com.
2) National Gypsum Company; _____: www.nationalgypsum.com.
3) USG Corporation; _____: www.usg.com.
4) Substitutions: Not permitted.
D.
Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM
C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.
2. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
4. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
5. Edges: Tapered.
6. Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer.
b. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Products:
a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board.
d. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
F.
Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM
C1177/C1177M.
4. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated.
5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
7. Edges: Square, for vertical application.
8. Glass Mat Faced Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch (25 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) wide, beveled
long edges, ends square cut.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
09 2116-5
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM
C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.
Products:
a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Shaftliner Type X.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner.
d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP
(mold-resistant).
e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCORE Gypsum Shaftliner Board type X.
f.
Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; SilentGuard Gypsum
Shaftliner.
g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels.
h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels--Enhanced (mold-resistant).
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3
1/2 inches.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board.
C.
Water-Resistive Barrier: No. 15 asphalt felt.
D.
Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
E.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as
otherwise indicated.
2. Chemical hardening type compound.
F.
High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
G.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch (0.7 mm) In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for
exterior locations.
H.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.8 to 2.8 mm) in
Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel
studs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B.
Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.
C.
Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
09 2116-6
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
D.
Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not
less than double studs at jambs.
E.
Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on
alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center.
1. Orientation: Vertical.
2. Spacing: As indicated.
F.
Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
G.
Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of:
1. Framed openings.
2. Wall mounted cabinets.
3. Plumbing fixtures.
4. Toilet partitions.
5. Toilet accessories.
6. Wall mounted door hardware.
3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and
rough-in boxes.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B.
Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
C.
Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted
tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
D.
Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where
indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet (16 meters)
long.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.07 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint
tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.
B.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
4.
5.
09 2116-7
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
???? 2014
Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas
specifically indicated.
Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.
Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of
project.
C.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
D.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface
after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
E.
Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
(3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 3000-1
TILING
???? 2014
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Tile for floor applications.
B.
Tile for wall applications.
C.
Tile for shower receptors.
D.
Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
E.
Ceramic accessories.
F.
Ceramic trim.
G.
Non-ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 1400 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
B.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
C.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
D.
Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.
B.
ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
C.
ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a
Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
2013.1.
D.
ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
E.
ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1.
F.
ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
G.
ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2013.1.
H.
ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2013.1.
I.
ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2013.1.
J.
ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
2013.1.
K.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
L.
ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing,
Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2013.1.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 3000-2
TILING
???? 2014
N.
ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
O.
ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;
2013.1.
P.
ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement
Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1.
Q.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
R.
ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.
S.
ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for
Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.
T.
TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation - Version; 2013.1.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions
with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and
setting details.
D.
Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches (450 x
450 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet (1 square meters) of each size, color, and surface finish
combination.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5
years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B.
Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation
of mortar materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A.
Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
1. Basis of Design: Manufacturer listed in the Finish Schedule in the Drawings.
2. Allowed Manufacturer's (unless finish schedule indicates no substitutions allowed):
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
09 3000-3
TILING
???? 2014
American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com.
Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.
Autostone Floor Systems: www.autostoneusa.com
Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com.
Crossville Ceramics; wwwcrossvilleinc.com.
Substitutions: Not permitted.from products indicated on the drawings.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
B.
Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in
sizes coordinated with field tile.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
b. Inside Corners: Jointed.
c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.
2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile.
C.
Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting
using tile mortar or adhesive.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open edges of wall tile.
b. Open edges of floor tile.
c. Wall corners, outside and inside.
d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
e. Thresholds at door openings.
f.
Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
g. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com.
1) Schiene - Tile edge protection and transitions.
(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel
2) Trep-E - Stair nosing Profile
3) Ren-U - Floor tranistion
(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel
4) Reno-T - T shaped floor transition
(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel
5) Dilex-BT - Expansion Joint
(a) Satin Stainless Steel
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of
bond coat is indicated.
2. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX X 77 MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com.
b. AVM Industries, Inc; Thin-Set 780: www.avmindustries.com.
c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com.
d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 720 Marble Pro: www.merkrete.com.
e. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com.
f.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 3000-4
TILING
???? 2014
2.04 GROUTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com.
2. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com.
3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
4. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com.
5. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Non-Sanded Color Grout: www.merkrete.com.
6. Bonsal American, Inc. www.sakrete.com .
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less
than 1/8 inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
4. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FG-C MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com.
b. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout:
www.laticrete.com.
d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Non-Sanded Color Grout:
www.merkrete.com.
e. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com.
f.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew
resistant type.
1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
3. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX SX: www.ardexamericas.com.
b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE LATASIL: www.laticrete.com.
c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Colored Caulking: www.merkrete.com.
d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Advantage Caulk: www.prospec.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.05 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not
intended as waterproofing.
1. Thickness: 30 mils (.75 mm), maximum.
2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) gap, minimum.
3. Products:
a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane:
www.laticrete.com.
b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Fracture Guard 5000: www.merkrete.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to
cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.
1. Type: Mortar-bonded sheet.
2. Material: Chlorinated polyethylene sheet membrane with polyester fabric laminated to both
sides, 30 mils (0.8 mm), thick, minimum.
3. Products:
a. Noble Company; NobleSeal TS: www.noblecompany.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
b.
C.
09 3000-5
TILING
???? 2014
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber
reinforced, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and
corners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:
1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft (7.1 kg per 100 sq m) per 24
hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
D.
Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.
Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of
ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E.
Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G.
Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
I.
Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
J.
Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
K.
Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
L.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A.
Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F102, with
standard grout.
3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS
A.
At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor,
and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.
B.
Grout with standard grout as specified above.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
09 3000-6
TILING
???? 2014
Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type ____ specified in Section 07
9005.
3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A.
Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,
using membrane at toilet rooms.
B.
Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202,
thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.
C.
Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W241, mortar
bed, with membrane where indicated.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.08 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5100-1
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
???? 2014
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of special anchors or inserts
for suspension system.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of special anchors or inserts for
suspension system.
C.
Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Placement of special anchors or inserts for suspension
system.
D.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation.
E.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
F.
Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels.
G.
Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
H.
Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
I.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
B.
ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.
C.
ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
D.
NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling
Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2011.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,
sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
D.
Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
09 5100-2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
???? 2014
Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum
humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com.
3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
4. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com.
5. USG: www.usg.com.
6. Substitutions: Not permitted. See drawings for schedule products.
B.
Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
C.
Plastic Lay-in Ceiling Panels Type _____: Complying with NFPA 286, Class A: _______.
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm).
2. Louver cell size: 1/2" x 1/2" by 1/2" nominal.
3. Minimum 0.065" wall thickness, injection molded.
4. Shielding angle: 45 degrees.
5. Surface Texture: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Color: White., translucent.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com.
3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
4. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com.
5. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com.
6. USG: www.usg.com.
7. Substitutions: Not permitted. See drawings for scheduled products.
B.
Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking
components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as
required.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of
grid.
C.
Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100.
1. Thickness: 2 inch (50 mm).
D.
Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 9005.
E.
Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
09 5100-3
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
???? 2014
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
B.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
C.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
D.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
E.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
to exceed deflection capability.
F.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each
corner, or support components independently.
G.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
H.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G.
Install plastic lay-in panels at following minimum distance from conventional light sources:
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5470-1
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
SECTION 09 5470
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. LEED Data: www.ecoscorecard.com
2. Perforated and un-perforated metal ceiling panels
3. Acoustical backing
4. Suspension systems
5. Accessories; provide other necessary items including devices for attachment overhead
construction, secondary members, splines, splices, connecting clips, wall connectors, wall
angles, and other devices required for a complete installation.
6. Supplemental support framing: Provide fully engineered secondary framing as required to
meet code, conforming to layout shown in drawings, to support direct-hung metal ceilings
suspension system.
7. Coordinate layout and installation of items penetrating or being installed in ceiling systems
with responsible trades.
B.
Related Sections / Work:
1. 1.
Sections 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed metal Framing
2. 2.
Sections 09 20 00 - Plaster and Gypsum Board
3. 3.
Sections 09 50 00 - Acoustical Ceilings
4. 4.
Sections 09 90 00 - Paintings and Coatings
5. 5.
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
6. 6.
Division 26 - Electrical
C.
Alternates (Substitutions):
1. Prior approval: unless otherwise provided for in the contract documents, proposed product
substitutions may be submitted no later than 10 working days prior to the date established
for receipt of bids. Approval of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect’s
review of the proposal for acceptability. Approved products will be set forth by addenda. If
substitute products have not been approved by addenda, but are included in a bid, the
specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.
2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be
considered. The proposed substitution must meet the requirements for this section,
including but not necessarily limited to the following: single source materials supplier (if
specified in Section 1.5); panel design, size, composition, color and finish; suspension
system component profiles and sizes; and compliance with the referenced standards
D.
This Section covers the general requirements only for Acoustical Metal Ceilings as shown on
the drawings. The supplying and installation of additional accessory feature and other items not
specifically mentioned herein, but which are necessary to make a complete installation shall
also be included or clarified accordingly.
E.
Qualification Data:
1. Test Reports: Certified reports from independent agency substantiating structural
compliance to windloads and other governing requirements.
2. Certificates:
a. Data substantiating manufacturer and installer qualifications.
b. Certified data attesting fire rated materials comply with specifications.
3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Detailed installation instructions and maintenance data.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5470-2
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. E 84 - “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”
2. E 488 - “Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry
Elements”
3. B 209 - “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate”
4. C 423 - “Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by Reverberation Room
Method”
5. E 580 - “Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint”
6. C 635 - “Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panel Ceilings”
7. C 636 - “Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspensions Systems for
Acoustical and Lay-in Panels”
8. A 641 - “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire”
9. A 653 - “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process.
10. E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products”
11. E 1477 - Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance factor of Acoustical Materials by
use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers”
12. D 1044 - Practice for Abrasion Resistance
13. D 1002 - Practice for Adhesion Resistance
B.
Applicable LEED Environmental Categories and Credits and performance requirements as
indicated:
1. Material and Resources (MR)
a. MR Credit 4.1 & 4.2 - Recycled Content
b. MR Credit 5.1 & 5.2 - Regional Materials
c. MR Credit 7.0 - Certified Wood
2. Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ)
a. EQ Credit 4.1 - Low Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants
b. EQ Credit 4.1 - Low Emitting Materials, Paints
c. EQ Credit 4.4 - Low Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber
3. Innovation in Design (IC)
a. IC Credit 1.1 - Enhanced Acoustical Performance
1.04 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s published literature, including specifications.
B.
LEED Submittal Data: Manufacturer’s product data for each product specified in this section
per ecoscorecard.com.
C.
Product Certification: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified
requirements and governing codes including product data, laboratory test reports and research
reports showing compliance with specified standards.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reflected ceiling plans (RCP’s), drawn to scale, and
indicating penetrations and ceiling mounted items. Show the following details:
1. Reflected Ceiling Plan(s): Indicating metal ceiling layout, ceiling mounted items and
penetrations.
2. Suspension System, Carrier and Component Layout.
3. Details of system assembly and connections to building components.
E.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units (or as specified below) of each type of ceiling assembly
indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of
variations expected in these characteristics. Submit samples for each type specified.
1. 11-inch square metal panel units.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
2.
3.
09 5470-3
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
11-inch long samples of each exposed molding or trim.
11-inch long samples of each suspension component.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications:
1. Provide metal ceiling system components produced by a single manufacturer with a
minimum 5 years experience in actual production of specified products and with resources
to provide consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, without delaying the
work.
2. Provide suspension system components produced by a single manufacturer to provide
compatible components for a complete metal ceiling system installation.
3. Perform installations using a firm with installers having no less than 3 years of successful
experience on projects of similar size and requirements.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
1. Fire Rating Performance Characteristics: Install system to provide a flame spread of 0 25, complying with certified testing to ASTM E 84.
2. Structural Criteria: Install and certify system to comply with structural and wind load
requirements of governing codes.
3. Installation Standard for Suspension System: Comply with ASTM C 636.
C.
Mock-Up: Prior to beginning installation erect a mock-up section, where directed, using all
system components.
D.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct a conference, prior to start of installation, to review
system requirements, shop drawings, and all coordination needs.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver system components in manufacturer’s original unopened packages, clearly labeled.
B.
Store components in fully enclosed dry space. Carefully place on skids, to damage from
moisture and other construction activities.
C.
Handle components to prevent damage to surfaces and edges, and to prevent distortion and
other physical damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Begin system installations only after spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, and after all wet
work and overhead work have been completed.
B.
Prior to starting installations, allow materials to reach ambient room temperature and humidity
intended to be maintained for occupancy.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Provide specified manufacturer’s warranty against defects in workmanship, discoloration, or
other defect considered undesirable by the Architect or Employer.
B.
This warranty shall remain in effect for a minimum period of one (1) year from date of initial
acceptance.
1.09 MAINTENANCE & EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturers standard maintenance and cleaning
instructions for finishes provided.
B.
Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
Only typical system components are included with attic stock.
1. Acoustical Metal Ceiling Pan Units: Full-size units equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount
installed.
2. Ceiling Suspension System Components: Quantity of each grid and exposed component
equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount installed.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5470-4
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A.
Provide “Luxalon” Hook-On metal plank ceiling system manufactured by Hunter Douglas
Architectural Products, Inc., 5015 Oakbrook Parkway, Suite 100, Norcross, GA 30093, USA.
Ph. (800) 366-4327.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Metal Plank Ceiling System for (interior) (exterior) installations:
B.
Panel Profile Type: Hook on, (.032”) (.040”) (.050”) (.063”) inch thick aluminum with square
edges
1. Width: (12 inches)(24 inches)
Width: (12 inches)(24 inches)
2. Length: (24 inches)(48 inches)(60 inches)(72 inches)(96 inches)
3. Other sizes available, Contact Hunter Douglas
4. Joint Style: Closed, butt joint.
C.
Hook-On Suspension System:
1. Plank Type: Hook-On plank formed with two ends to hook securely onto runners.
2. Structural Classification: (intermediate duty) (heavy duty).
3. Primary runners: 1 1/2 inches deep, 16 Ga., galvanized steel “C” channels.
4. Hangers: 1 1/2” deep, 16 Ga., cold rolled steel “C” channels.
5. Hanger wire: 12 Ga. pre-stretched galvanized steel.
6. Secondary runners: 18 Ga. Pre-punched galvanized steel, 1 5/8 inches (41 mm) deep,
Z-shaped.
7. Connectors: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) diameter, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, 2 inch(51 mm) deep U
bolts with flat plate and nuts.
D.
Seismic / Wind Uplift Compression Struts: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) deep, 16 Ga., cold rolled steel “C”
channels.
E.
Perforations: (Non Perforated)(Perforation #____)
1. Standard perforations, see website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com/ceilings
<http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/ceilings>.
2. Standard perforation border ¼”
3. Other optional patterns available. Contact Hunter Douglas.
F.
Panel Finish
1. Paint; color to be selected by architect
a. a. Applied Polyester
b. b. Powder coat
2. Anodized (interior only)
3. Film Profiled Wrapped (interior only)
4. Wood veneer (interior only)
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Suspension System Carrier/Channel Splices: Manufacturer’s standard splices with matching
profile and attachment holes.
B.
Wall Moldings / Trim: Box mold (standard).
C.
Clips: Manufacturer’s standard hold-down, security and seismic clips.
D.
Access Panels: Manufacturer’s standard hinged style at locations indicated.
E.
Acoustic Material: (Non-woven black fabric) (Non-woven black fabric with 1 inch thick glass
fiber, 1 1/2 pcf density, enclosed in black polyethylene)(1 inch thick glass fiber, 1 1/2 pcf density,
enclosed in black polyethylene)
F.
Custom Panels and Trim Pieces: Fabricate panels for dropped soffit returns and similar
conditions from materials and finishes to match selected ceiling plank.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5470-5
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
G.
Plenum Access Tool: Manufacturer’s standard for removing snap-in type panels.
H.
Lighting Fixtures (Modular Type “M” or “MT” flange) and HVAC diffusers: Optional.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical metal panels attach or abut, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that
affect installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of metal panel
ceilings.
B.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical metal pan units to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width units at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
C.
Survey substrate for wall attachment to assure squareness and proper elevation for wall panel
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical metal pan ceilings, per manufacturers shop drawings provided, per
manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with publications referenced below.
1. ClSCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook.
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations - ASTM C 636.
3. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint - ASTM E 580
4. IBC (International Building Code) standard for Seismic Zone for local area.
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's approved structural substrates and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produce hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Where used secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above
with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate;
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches on center, along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches
from ends of each member. Supply supporting calculations from licensed Structural
Engineer verifying hanger spacing meets all requirements, when spacing exceed those
recommended.
6. Fine level grid to 1/8 inch in 10 feet from specified elevation(s), square and true.
7. Adjust suspension system runners so they are square (within .5 degree from 90 degrees)
and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked
members.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 5470-6
METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM
???? 2014
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports acceptable to Architect /
Engineer and or inspector. Suspend bracing from building's structural members and / or
structural deck, as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel
deck, or steel deck tabs(unless directed otherwise).
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pan. Method of edge trim attachment
and design of edge trims to be approved by Architect.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 18” O.C. and not more than
6” from ends, leveling with ceding suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8” in 10’. Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim without prior
written approval. Or unless detailed otherwise.
E.
Scribe and cut acoustical metal panel units for accurate fit at penetrations by, other work
through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or
variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.
F.
Install acoustical metal panel units in coordination with suspension system.
1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in both
directions, unless otherwise indicated. Install directionally patterned or textured panels in
directions indicated on approved shop drawings. Panel-joints shall flow smoothly and in a
straight line within 1/8” in 10’. Intersections shall be continuous.
2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at borders
and around construction penetrating ceiling.
3. Remove protective film from panels only when space is completely clean and free of
airborne particles. Use white cotton gloves for final installation of panels into grid system.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Adjust components to provide uniform tolerances.
B.
Replace all ceiling panels that are scratched, dented or otherwise damaged.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces with non-solvent, non-abrasive commercial type cleaner.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 6500-1
RESILIENT FLOORING
???? 2014
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.01 TILE FLOORING
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type
specified.
2. Size: 12 x 12 inch (305 x 305 mm).
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
4. Pattern: Solid color.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
b. Mannington Mills, Inc: www.mannington.com.
c. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.
d. other manufacturers as indicated on the drawings. .
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Rubber Tile: Homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness, and:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1344, of Class corresponding to type
specified.
2. Design: as indicated on the drawings..
3. Size: 12 x 12 inch (305 x 305 mm).
4. Overall Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
5. Pattern: Solid color.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkeflooring.com.
b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.
c. Flexco, Inc: www.flexcofloors.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Feature Strips: Of same material as tile, 8 inch wide.
1.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,
and as follows:
1. Height: 4 inch (100 mm).
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.
c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
d. other manufacturers as indicated on the drawings. .
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
C.
Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
D.
09 6500-2
RESILIENT FLOORING
???? 2014
Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that
might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,
and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient
flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
C.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
2.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
B.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
2.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
flooring under centerline of door.
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated.
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
2.04 TILE FLOORING
A.
Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless
manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.
2.05 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between
joints.
B.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
2.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.07 PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 6800-1
CARPETING
???? 2014
SECTION 09 6800
CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet, direct-glued.
B.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.
B.
Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Plumbing floor cover plate with recess for
carpet.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor
Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
B.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2011.
C.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and
pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings .
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 18x18 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating color and pattern
for each carpet and cushion material specified.
E.
Submit two, 12 inch (____ mm) long samples of edge strip for each color specified.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
H.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with
minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
B.
Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during
and 24 hours after installation.
C.
Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Carpet:
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
2.
09 6800-2
CARPETING
???? 2014
As indicated on the drawings .
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 CARPET
A.
Carpet Type As indicated on the drawings.:
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B.
Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Contact Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer; releasable type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet.
B.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesives to sub floor surfaces.
C.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with sub-floor filler.
C.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is
cured.
D.
Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet
Installation Standard.
C.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main
traffic.
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent
pieces.
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
E.
Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.
3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET
A.
Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.
B.
Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient
open time, press carpet into adhesive.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 6800-3
CARPETING
???? 2014
C.
Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam
straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
D.
Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.
E.
Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.
3.05 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS
A.
Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut
edges.
B.
Install carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.
C.
Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 6813-1
TILE CARPETING
???? 2014
SECTION 09 6813
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet tile, fully adhered.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors.
B.
Section 09 6800 - Carpeting: Broadloom carpet.
C.
Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Plumbing floor cover plate with recess for
carpet.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2011.
B.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color
selected.
E.
Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
H.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern
installed.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile : Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B.
Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, satin natural color.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
C.
09 6813-2
TILE CARPETING
???? 2014
Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered:
maximum VOC content as requlated by local jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with sub-floor filler.
C.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is
cured.
D.
Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation
Standard.
C.
Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D.
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E.
Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building
lines.
F.
Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
G.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 7200-1
WALL COVERINGS
???? 2014
SECTION 09 7200
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation and prime painting.
B.
Wall covering .
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM F793 - Standard Classification of Wallcovering by Use Characteristics; 2010a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 24x24 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating
color, finish, and texture.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section with minimum three years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability.
B.
Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.
C.
Do not store roll goods on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.
B.
Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall
covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE BID MANUFACTURER
A.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Koroseal/RJF International; Product ____: www.koroseal.com.
2. MDC Wallcoverings; Product ____: www.mdcwall.com.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Wall Covering : Vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following:
1. Total Weight: 20 oz/sq yd (_____ g/sq m).
2. Roll Width: 54 inches (_____ mm).
3. Color: As scheduled on the drawings..
B.
Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.
C.
Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible
with substrate.
D.
Substrate Primer and Sealer: Alkyd enamel type.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 7200-2
WALL COVERINGS
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to
requirements of the wall covering manufacturer.
B.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall
coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
C.
Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m)
nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft (1.5 mm/300 mm).
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.
B.
Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.
C.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing
coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.
E.
Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes.
F.
Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth.
G.
Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use wall covering in pattern sequence.
C.
Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.
D.
Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and
ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly.
E.
Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
F.
Do not seam within 2 inches (50 mm) of internal corners or within 6 inches (150 mm) of external
corners.
G.
Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from
wall surface.
H.
Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.
I.
Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact
adhesive within 6 inches (150 mm) of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond.
J.
Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet.
Wipe clean with dry cloth.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
B.
Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9000-1
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
SECTION 09 9000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Elevator pit ladders.
3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
4. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and
electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view,
including that which is factory-finished.
d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that
are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible
surfaces.
e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard
cabinets to match face panels.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
B.
Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items.
C.
Section 09 9600 - High-Performance Coatings.
D.
Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2012.
C.
ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9000-2
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of
each system.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum three years experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.
Provide panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors;
50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for
interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
F.
09 9000-3
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent
possible.
C.
Paints:
1. Base Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Co..
2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com.
3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
5. Porter
6. ICI
D.
Transparent Finishes:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
E.
Stains:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
F.
Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
G.
Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
H.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
a. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
E.
Colors: As indicated on drawings
1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without
additional cost to Owner.
2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9000-4
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
D.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
H.
Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high
alkali surfaces.
I.
Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
J.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
K.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool
cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
L.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power
tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9000-5
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint
entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
M. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
N.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
O.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,
seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer
has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
percent with thinner.
P.
Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before
installation.
Q.
Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
R.
Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear
sealer.
S.
Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B.
Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
C.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
E.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F.
Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many
coats as necessary for complete hide.
G.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
H.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
I.
Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
J.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
B.
Owner will provide field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9000-6
PAINTING AND COATING
???? 2014
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09911 - PAINT SCHEDULE
Praxis3 Architects
Interior Walls
Space
Substrate
Manufacturer
Primer
Final Coat(s)
Sheen
Showroom
Gypsum Board
Duron
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Low Sheen, 36
Series
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec
Sherwin Williams
Duron
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,
B28W200
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec
Sherwin Williams
Duron
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,
B28W200
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec
Sherwin Williams
Duron
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,
B28W200
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec
Sherwin Williams
Duron
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,
B28W200
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec
Sherwin Williams
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,
B28W200
16-110-55 Dura Crete HP
Acrylic Block Filler
Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Latex Low Sheen- 2
coats
286 Super Spec
Enamel
ProMar 200 Latex Wall
Paint - 2 coats
Plastic Kote Acrylic
Latex-2 coats
286 Super Spec
Enamel
Duration Home Latex
Wall Paint - 2 coats
Plastic Kote Acrylic
Latex-2coats
286 Super Spec
Enamel
Duration Home Latex
Wall Paint - 2 coats
Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Latex Low Sheen- 2
coats
286 Super Spec
Enamel
ProMar 200 Latex Wall
Paint - 2 coats
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2
coats
m22 Alkyd urethane
gloss enamel
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2
coats
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2
coats
Benjamin Moore
CMU - 285 blockfiller
Concrete 068 sealer
m42 waterborne
Gloss
polyamide gloss epoxy
Sherwin Williams
Heavy Duty Block Filler,
B42W46
16-110-55 Dura Crete HP
Acrylic Block Filler
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 Gloss - B62Z Series
coats
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2 Gloss-B62Z
coats
Benjamin Moore
CMU - 285 blockfiller
Concrete - 068 sealer
m42 waterborne
Gloss
polyamide gloss epoxy
Sherwin Williams
Heavy Duty Block Filler,
B42W46
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 Gloss - B62Z Series
coats
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy, 2 Gloss, B62Z
coats
Sales Offices
Customer Lounge
Back of house
offices
Service Drive
Gypsum Board
Gypsum Board
Gypsum Board
Gypsum Board
CMU or Concrete (precast
or tilt-up)
Parts Department
CMU or Concrete (precast
or tilt-up)
Gypsum Board
Duron
Duron
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Eggshell
Eg-shell, B20-2200
Eggshell, 29 series
Eggshell
Satin - A97 Series
Eggshell, 29 series
Eggshell
Satin - A97 Series
Low Sheen, 36
Series
Eggshell
Eg-shell, B20-2200
Gloss-B62Z
Gloss
Gloss - B62Z Series
Gloss-B62Z
253 Super Spec
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer, Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 Gloss - B62Z Series
B28W200
coats
09911 - 1
SECTION 09911 - PAINT SCHEDULE
Praxis3 Architects
Service Shop
CMU or Concrete (precast Duron
or tilt-up) (Epoxy wainscot)
CMU or Concrete (above
epoxy wainscot)
CMU - blockfiller
Concrete- 068 sealer
m42 waterborne
Gloss
polyamide gloss epoxy
Sherwin Williams
Heavy Duty Block Filler,
B4246
16-110-55 Dura Crete HP
Acrylic Block Filler
Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 Gloss - B62Z Series
coats
Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Low Sheen, 36
Latex Low Sheen- 2
Series
coats
CMU - 285 blockfiller
Conrete - 068 sealer
GWB 253 Super Spec
Heavy Duty Block Filler,
B42W46
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
m42 waterborne
Gloss
polyamide gloss epoxy
Duron
Sherwin Williams
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Tech Support
Areas
CMU
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
GWB
Gloss, B62Z
Benjamin Moore
Benjamin Moore
GWB (above expoxy
wainscot)
16-110-55 Dura Crete HP Tile-Clad HS Epoxy, 2
Acrylic Block Filler
coats
ProMar 200 Latex Wall
Paint - 2 coats
Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Latex Low Sheen- 2
coats
253 Super Spec
309 Impervex Acrylic
Enamel
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer, ProMar 200 Latex Wall
B28W200
Paint - 2 coats
16-110-55 Dura Crete HP Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Acrylic Block Filler
Latex Low Sheen- 2
coats
285 blockfiller
m42 waterborne
polyamide gloss epoxy
Duron
Heavy Duty Block Filler,
B42W46
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Benjamin Moore
253 Super Spec sealer
Sherwin Williams
Eg-shell - B20-2200
Low Sheen, 36
Series
Gloss
Eg-shell - B20-2200
Low Sheen, 36
Series
Gloss
ProMar 200 Latex Wall Eg-shell - B20-2200
Paint - 2 coats
Ultra Deluxe Acrylic
Low Sheen, 36
Latex Low Sheen- 2
Series
coats
309 Impervex Acrylic
Gloss
Enamel
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer, ProMar 200 Latex Wall Eg-shell - B20-2200
B28W200
Paint - 2 coats
09911 - 2
SECTION 09911 - PAINT SCHEDULE
Praxis3 Architects
Interior Ceilings
Showroom
Gypsum Board
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Metal structure, exposed
ducts, etc. (Dry Fog)
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Shop and Parts
Metal structure, exposed
ducts, etc. (Dry Fog)
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
04-125 Int Latex Sealer
Pro Kote Supreme
Interior Latex, 2 coats
253 Super Spec Sealer
286 Super Spec
Enamel
PrepRite 200 Wall Primer, ProMar 400 Latex Wall
B28W200
paint - 2 coats
ProCryl Universal
Water Based Acrylic
Waterbased Primer, B66- Dryfall
310
MO7 Universal Metal
M53 Sweep-up Acrylic
primer
Dryfall
ProCryl Universal
Water Based Acrylic
Waterbased Primer, B66- Dryfall
310 Series
ProCryl Universal
Water Based Acrylic
Waterbased Primer, B66- Dryfall
310
M07 Universal Metal
M53 Sweep-up Acrylic
Primer
Dryfall
ProCryl Universal
Water Based Acrylic
Waterbased Primer, B66- Dryfall
310 Series
Flat, 59 Series
Eggshell
Flat, B30-400
Series
Flat, B42 Series
Flat
Flat - B42 Series
Flat, B42 Series
Flat
Flat - B42 Series
09911 - 3
SECTION 09911 - PAINT SCHEDULE
Praxis3 Architects
Exterior
Exterior
CMU or Concrete
(elastomeric)
Duron
16-110 Dura Crete HP
Acrylic Block Filler
80-920 Smooth Maxflex Flat
Acrylic High Build
Elastomeric Coating
Benjamin Moore
CMU -285 Super Spec
Block filler: Concrete 068
Acrylic Primer
Loxon Block Surfacer,
A24W200
ProCryl Universal
Waterbased Primer, B66310
055 Moorlastic 100%
Low Lustre
Acrylic Elastomeric
Coating
SherLastic Elastomeric - Flat - A5 Series
2 coats
Dura Clad PreGloss, 902-Series
Catalyzed (single
component) Acrylic
Urethane,
M22 Alkyd Urethane
High Gloss
Enamel: -or- M73
Waterborne Urethane
Sherwin Williams
Hollow Metal
Steel
Frames and Doors
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Pipe Bollards
Steel
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Sherwin Williams
Steel Detailing
Steel
Duron
Benjamin Moore
Gypsum Board
MO7 Universal Metal
Primer: -or- M42-70
Waterborne Polyamide
Epoxy Primer
ProCryl Universal
Waterbased Primer, B66310 Series
33-010 Dura Clad 50
Alkyd White Primer
Industrial Urethane
Enamel - 2 coats
Gloss - B54 Series
Dura Clad PreCatalyzed (single
component) Acrylic
Urethane
M22 Alkyd Urethane
Enamel: -or- M73
Waterborne Urethane
Gloss, 902-Series
Industrial Urethane
Enamel - 2 coats
Gloss - B54 Series
High Gloss
Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Gloss-12 Series
Enamel-2 coats
MO6 Alkyd Metal Primer: - M22 Alkyd Urethane
or- M42-70 Waterbrone
Enamel -or- M73
Epoxy Primer
Waterborne Acrylic
Urethane
Kem Kromik Universal
Industrial Urethane
Metal Primer, B50Z Series Enamel - 2 coats
Gloss
Duron
08-124 Bond N Seal
Primer
Ultra Deluxe Exterior
100% Acrylic
Flat, 18-916 Series
Satin, 165 Series
Benjamin Moore
023 Fresh Start Acrylic
Primer
A-100 Exterior Latex
Primer, B42 Series
185 Super Spec 100%
Acrylic Paint
A-100 Exterior Latex
House Paint - 2 coats
Low Lustre
Sherwin Williams
Ceilings
MO7 Universal Metal
Primer: -or- M42-70
Waterborne Polyamide
Epoxy Primer
ProCryl Universal
Waterbased Primer, B66310 Series
ProCryl Universal
Waterbased Primer, B66310
Sherwin Williams
Gloss - B54 Series
Satin - A82 Series
09911 - 4
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9600-1
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
???? 2014
SECTION 09 9600
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
High performance coatings.
B.
Special preparation of surfaces.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
B.
SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
C.
SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
D.
SSPC-SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.
E.
SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.
F.
SSPC-SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.
G.
SSPC-SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000 (Ed. 2007).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials .
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon (4 liters) of each type and color.
2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room
names and numbers where used.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document that applies to application on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved
by manufacturer.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating coating, for each specified coating.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or above 90
degrees F (32 degrees C).
B.
Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of
coating.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9600-2
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
???? 2014
C.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
D.
Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
High-Performance Coatings:
1. Carboline Company: www.carboline.com.
2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.protective.sherwin-williams.com/industries.
4. Tnemec Company, Inc: www.tnemec.com.
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats
specified does not include primer or filler coat.
1. Lead content: Not greater than 0.06 percent by weight of total nonvolatile content.
2. Chromium content, as hexavalent chromium, zinc chromate, or strontium chromate:
None.
3. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: As required by applicable
regulations.
4. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
B.
Epoxy Coating: Two coats, water-based epoxy, gloss finish.
C.
Urethane Coating: Two coats, two-part, aliphatic moisture-curing polyurethane, gloss finish.
D.
Epoxy Floor Coating: Two coats, two-part, polyamide epoxy, non-skid finish.
E.
Masonry Filler: Vehicle and resin compatible with topcoats, Portland cement and sand,
formulated for applied thickness of 30-40 mils (0.8-1.0 mm) .
F.
Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise
specified.
G.
Shellac: Pure, white type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating
manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of
substrates.
C.
Cementitious Substrates: Do not begin application until substrate has cured 28 days minimum
and measured moisture content is not greater than 16 percent.
D.
Masonry: Verify masonry joints are struck flush.
E.
Wood: Do not begin application if substrate has moisture content over 12 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.
B.
Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface
with shellac.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
09 9600-3
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
???? 2014
C.
Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store.
D.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
E.
Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean.
2. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using power tools
according to SSPC-SP 3.
F.
Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask
if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.
3.03 PRIMING
A.
Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in
accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Concrete: Prior to priming, patch with masonry filler to produce smooth surface.
C.
Concrete Masonry: Apply masonry filler to thickness required to fill holes and produce smooth
surface; minimum thickness of 30 mils (0.8 mm).
3.04 COATING APPLICATION
A.
Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified.
B.
Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in
color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with
full coating thickness.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
B.
Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.
C.
After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously
removed.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished work from damage.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 1101-1
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
???? 2014
SECTION 10 1101
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Markerboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.
B.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.
C.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Finishing of wood frame and chalkrail.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
C.
ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard and trim.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal .
1.05 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to
cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Visual Display Boards:
1. MooreCo, Inc: www.moorecoinc.com.
2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.
3. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
A.
Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.
1. Color: White.
2. Metal Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024 inch, 24 gage (0.61 mm).
3. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet.
4. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core.
5. Size: As indicated on drawings.
6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.
7. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.
8. Accessories: Provide chalk tray.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous
finish.
B.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.
C.
Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 1101-2
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure units level and plumb.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 1400-1
SIGNAGE
???? 2014
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B.
Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Flat Signs:
1. Manufacturer as indicated on the drawings..
2. ASI-Modulex, Dallas Texas, (214) 352-9140 if no manufacturer indicated.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible
Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the
event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific
requirements.
B.
Signs as indicated on the drawing door schedule.
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A.
Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Clear Cover: For customer produced sign media, provide clear cover of polycarbonate
plastic, glossy on back, non-glare on front.
4. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.
5. Size: 8 inches x 8 inches by 0.125 inches thick.
B.
Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.
2. Character Case: Upper case only.
3. Background Color: Solid color selected from manufacturers standard colors..
4. Character Color: Selected from manufacturers standard color.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 1400-2
SIGNAGE
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C.
Locate signs where indicated:
1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60
inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.
2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
D.
Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 2113.13-1
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
???? 2014
SECTION 10 2113.13
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal toilet compartments.
B.
Urinal screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Concealed steel support members.
B.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members.
C.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.
D.
Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
C.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and
ceilings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,
door swings.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 x 4 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating
panel finish, color, and sheen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Toilet Compartments:
1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp: www.generalpartitions.com.
2. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com.
3. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com.
4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor-mounted unbraced.
B.
Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core,
formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
1. Panel Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm).
2. Door Faces: 22 gage (0.8 mm).
3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
4.
10 2113.13-2
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
???? 2014
Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm).
C.
Door and Panel Dimensions:
1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm).
3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm), out-swinging.
4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm).
D.
Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing.
E.
Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor-to-ceiling vertical upright
consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling.
F.
Urinal Screen Splash Panels: Stainless steel sheet 30 inch (760 mm) wide x 42 inch (1 066
mm) high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced
8 inches (20 mm) on center.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175
mm) high, concealing floor fastenings.
1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with
pilaster.
B.
Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with anti-grip strips
and cast socket wall brackets.
C.
Brackets: Satin stainless steel.
D.
Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.
1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.
E.
Hardware: Satin stainless steel:
1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.
2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature.
3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door
latch.
4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door.
5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.
2.05 FINISHING
A.
Stainless Steel Compartments: No. 4 finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C.
Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
D.
Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end
pilasters.
C.
Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D.
Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 2113.13-3
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
???? 2014
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
C.
Maximum opening between panels, door or offset from wall is 1/2 inch. Installations exceeding
this will be removed and replaced at the contractors sole expense.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16
inch (5 mm).
B.
Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging
doors to closed position.
C.
Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 2800-1
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
???? 2014
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 2116-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports for accessories, including in
wall framing and plates and above ceiling framing.
B.
Section 08 8300 - Mirrors: Other mirrors.
C.
Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.
D.
Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2013.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
D.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
E.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
F.
ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
G.
ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing
Tables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling
supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com.
2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C.
All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 2800-2
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
???? 2014
B.
Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
E.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with
G90/Z275 coating.
F.
Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective
and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
G.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
H.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
I.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.03 FINISHES
A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
As indicated on the Toilet Accessories Schedules in the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the
drawings.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on
drawings
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 4400-1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
???? 2014
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire extinguishers.
B.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.
C.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers:
1. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Cleanguard: www.ansul.com.
2. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.pyrochem.com.
B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Basis of Design:
a. Larsens Manufacturing Co.; Product: Aluminum 2409-R2, Vertical Duo, Vertical white
lettering.
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.ansul.com.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.
c. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.
d. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.pyrochem.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
B.
Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class: A:B:C.
2. Size: 10 pound (4.54 kg).
3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 4400-2
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
???? 2014
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A.
Metal: Formed aluminum; ____ inch (.05 mm) thick.
B.
Cabinet Configuration: Recessed or semi-recessed at finished steel stud framed walls with
finished ceiling and floor.
C.
Cabinet Configuration: Surface mounted at finshed spaces with CMU walls.
D.
Bracket mounted: Parts and Storage spaces.
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim: Flat, 1 1/2 inch wide face.
3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim
and door stiles.
E.
Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180
degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.
F.
Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket
glazing.
G.
Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
H.
Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
I.
Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Anodized to color as selected.
J.
Finish of Cabinet Interior: Anodized aluminum..
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
B.
Cabinet Signage: Letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in white vinyl, self adhering, pre-spaced
lettering, mounted vertically on glass and rotated 90 degrees to the space floor..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets prior to Substantial Completon inspection.
Include tag indicating acceptable charge pressure, charge date and service agent.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
10 5100-1
LOCKERS
???? 2014
SECTION 10 5100
LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Solid plastic lockers.
B.
Locker benches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete base construction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and color selection chart.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Solid Plastic Lockers:
2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS
A.
Student Lockers: Single tier solid plastic (HDPE) lockers, recessed mounted.
1. Width: 12 inches (300 mm).
2. Depth: 18 inches (450 mm).
3. Height: 72 inches (1,830 m).
4. Fittings: Hat shelf, 2 coat hooks.
5. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner.
6. Provide sloped top.
B.
Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of laminated birch; painted steel pedestals.
1. Height: 18"
2. Length: As indicated on the drawings.
2.03 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS
A.
Lockers: Factory assembled, made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) panels, homogenous
color throughout, with mortise and tenon joints with stainless steel fasteners or heat fused joints.
1. Doors: Full overlay without frame.
2. Ventilation: By open space between the back of the door and locker body.
3. Door Color: To be selected by Architect.
4. Body Color: Manufacturer's standard white or light color.
B.
Component Thicknesses:
1. Doors: 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum thickness.
C.
Solid Plastic Panels: High Density polyethylene (HDPE) formed under high pressure into solid
plastic components.
D.
Hinges: Full height of locker, manufacturer's standard heavy duty type.
E.
Locks: Locker manufacturer's standard type of style indicated above.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
B.
10 5100-2
LOCKERS
???? 2014
Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install lockers plumb and square.
C.
Place and secure on prepared base.
D.
Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb
(445 N).
E.
Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
F.
Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops.
G.
Install accessories.
H.
Replace components that do not operate smoothly.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 2113-1
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
???? 2014
SECTION 12 2113
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Horizontal slat louver blinds.
B.
Operating hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail
brackets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering
Manufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1)
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, ____ inch (____ mm) long illustrating slat materials and finish,
cord type and color.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Blind Assemblies: One of each size.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1. Hunter Douglas; ____: www.hunterdouglas.com.
2. Levolor Contract; ____: www.levolorcontract.com.
3. SWFcontract, a division of Spring Window Fashions, LLC.; ____: www.swfcontract.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS
A.
Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual
control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control
wand; complying with WCMA A100.1.
B.
Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing
burrs removed.
1. Width: 1 inch (___ mm).
2. Thickness:.008 inch (____ mm).
3. Color: As selected.
C.
Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.
D.
Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware,
pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
1.
12 2113-2
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
???? 2014
Color: Same as slats .
E.
Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end
caps. Color: Same as headrail.
F.
Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop.
1. Free end weighted.
G.
Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.
1. Removable type.
2. Length of window opening height less 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Color: As selected .
H.
Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.
I.
Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Determine sizes by field measurement.
B.
Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch (____ mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B.
Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 2492-1
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
???? 2014
SECTION 12 2492
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
Section includes
1. Motor operated Roller Shades
B.
Related work includes the following:
1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
2. Section 08520: Aluminum Windows
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701
B.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior
Materials
C.
California Administrative Code Title 19
D.
Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for
drapery, curtain, and upholstery material)
E.
Boston Fire Department Teat BFD IX-1
F.
New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Subject under provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets shall be submitted for each product specified,
including:,
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations
2. Finishes, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
3. Construction and installation instructions
4. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning
C.
Drawings and Diagrams: Product details, installation details, working and assembly drawings
shall be supplied as requested.
D.
Sample: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each type
specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all
required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty.
E.
Electric shade motors shall comply with UL standards. Copy of compliance available for
submission upon request.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products
specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty.
B.
Installer: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience,
demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or
licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.
C.
Uniformity: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire project.
D.
Mock up: Provide (1) mock-up shade for each roller shade type/assembly specified.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging.
B.
Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating
mechanisms.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 2492-2
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
???? 2014
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed.
B.
Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation;
relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties available
from manufacturer or its authorized agent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.
Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12250 Parkway Centre Dr. / Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800-727-8953
Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com
<http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/>, or architect approved equivalent. Contact the
following for project assistance and dealer referral @ 800-964-2580: (Mideast/Midwest) Keith
Burgess ext. #827311, (Southern/Central) Christopher Hagen ext. #827312,
(Western/Mountain/Upper Midwest) David Cover ext. #827313, (Northeast) Patrick LeClair ext.
#827314, (Southwest) Matthew Craven ext. #827317
B.
Request for substitutions must be approved by architect minimum of 30 days prior to close of
bid.
2.02 MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
A.
PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas Contract “RB 500 Motorized Roller Shades”
B.
MATERIALS:
1. FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering,
room darkening, & blackout fabrics providing 0% - 14% openness factors. Fabric weights
to range between 6.00 oz/sq.yd. - 20.70 oz/sq.yd., containing fiberglass, PVC, polyester,
acrylic, vinyl laminates, cotton, & vinyl coatings. Finish selected by architect from
manufacturer’s available contract colors.
2. ROLLER SHADE MOTORS: Design of shade motors is based on the Whisper
HDC100RQ and HDC200RQ control system manufactured by Hunter Douglas Contract
Window Coverings.
a. MOTORS:
1) Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors with a 3 conductor keyed AC
power plug at the motor head that can be detached at the motor head assembly
directly. Concealed inside roller shade tube. Quiet operation of up to 44dBa
within 3’.
2) Intelligent AC motor 115 VAC, 50-60 Hz, thermally protected, lifetime lubricated,
equipped with an internal thermal overload protector. Maximum current draw not
to exceed 0.9 amps when operating up to an overall width of 156”, or a
maximum current of 1.8 amps when operating 156”+ overall width.
3) Provide the ability to set limit stop positioning (maximum up/down limits) through
3 clear buttons with internal LED’s.
4) Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all rollershades in the same
room.
5) Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated
lifting capacity of 6Nm when operating up to 156” overall width, and 12Nm when
operating 156”+ overall width.
6) Motors must include an embedded Motor Control System without requiring any
external motor logic control system outside of the motor assembly unit itself.
b. KEYPAD/LOCAL USER OVERRIDE:
1) Allow for keypad switch control for up to 24 buttons connected directly to the
Whisper RQ motor assembly to allocate for individual and group control, with up
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
12 2492-3
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
???? 2014
to four intermediate stop positions. When utilizing intermediate stop positions, all
shades in the same room must be able to perfectly align with each other along
those programmed intermediate stops.
2) Connect local wall switches/keypads directly to the motor assembly itself via a
low voltage (DC) CAT5/RJ25 cable. A low voltage (DC) splitter is used to
connect the keypad to the motor, and to allow for communication/direct
connection to adjacent motors in the same network.
3) Controls shall be Master and Subgroup switching for all three elevations, as
indicated in Contract Documents.
c. CONTROL SYSTEMS:
1) Design of motor control system is based on the Whisper RQ control system
manufactured by Hunter Douglas Contract Window Coverings, or equal.
Motor Control System:
a. Must be integrated into the motor unit itself. External motor control systems that
require “home run” 110v line voltage will not be accepted.
b. Motor Control System must provide bidirectional feedback, allowing for two-way
communication between the motor with embedded internal motor control system and
it’s point of communication.
c. Motor control system allows for backward compatibility to allow for the add-on of
building automation system integration, audio-visual systems, third party light control
systems, light sensors, Radio Frequency and Infrared Remote operation, all through
means of plugging into the splitter via a low voltage (DC) CAT6/RJ25 plug-in.
d. Allow for up to 100 Whisper RQ Motors to be networked together to allow for master
group controlling or integration with third-party light control and building automation
systems.
e. Allow for up to four intermediate stop positioning via the keypad/local-user override, or
up to 98 intermediate stop positioning if accepting commands via serial input
(computer, third party light control systems, or automation systems)
f.
Allow for operation of all motors via a computer on the GUI PRO system..
g. Reconfiguration of switch shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage motor
power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switch
groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (Whisper RQ with
embedded internal motor control system)
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
DUAL ROLLER SHADES: Universal mount steel brackets with 2 separate solar and room
darkening blackout roller shades operating independently of each other.
B.
ROLLER TUBE: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6.
2”outside diameter extruded tube to have a .063” wall thickness (2.5” outside diameter to have a
.079” wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum six internal ribs providing additional
tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch & end plug.
C.
HEAVY DUTY TUBE BEARING PLUG: Die cast metal and reinforced idler assembly containing
spring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allows for up to 7/8” adjustment and provides
for a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6
ribs and inserted a minimum of 2-3/8” into roller tube.
D.
BOTTOM BAR: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar, or RB Bottom Bar for
fabrics that are not seamable. Bottom bar is for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look.
E.
MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard heavy duty bracket constructed of
hardened 1/8” thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket & screw hole covers to
provide uniform look. Integrated leveling device for enhanced level adjustment of overall shade.
Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provides for a secure installation and removal of the
shade.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 2492-4
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES
???? 2014
F.
FASCIA: L shape removable aluminum extrusion valance that attaches to brackets and
conceals roller shade.
G.
ROLLER SHADE POCKET: Extruded aluminum alloy U shape housing for recessed mounting
in acoustical tile or drywall ceilings. 5.25” (or 9”) in diameter with aluminum closure mount.
H.
BLOCKOUT SYSTEM: Extruded aluminum side channel with concealed mounting brackets.
Bottom bar with nylon wool pile to prevent light leakage.
I.
ADDITIONAL AVAILABLE OPTIONS: RB500 Bottom Bar, Reverse Roll, Detachable Spline,
Internal Auto Stop Mechanism, Coupled and Banded
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
2.05 FABRICS
A.
FABRIC selection from the following: (0% Openness) Avila Twilight, Edessa Twilight, Geneva
Twilight, Flocke, Morocco, Pima, Sheerweave 7000, Sheerweave 7100, Sheerweave 7300 (1%
Openness) GlacierScreen HD2001, GreenScreen Revive 1%, E Screen 7501,Vizela,
Sheerweave 7350, Sheerweave 2701, Sheerweave 4800 (3% Openness) GlacierScreen
HD1003, GlacierScreen HD2003, GreenScreen Eco, GreenScreen Revive 3%, T Screen, E
Screen 7503, E Screen 7703 KoolBlack, M Screen 8503, T Screen, Sheerweave 2410,
Sheerweave 2410 Performance +, Infinity2, Sheerweave 2703, Sheerweave 4400, Sheerweave
4600, Sheerweave 4650, (4% Openness) Star 2115 (5% Openness) GlacierScreen HD1005, E
Screen 7505, E Screen 7705 KoolBlack, Cortina, Satine, M Screen 8505, M Screen Deco,
SilverScreen, Sheerweave 2000, Sheerweave 2390, Sheerweave 2390 Performance +,
Sheerweave 2705, Sheerweave 4000, Sheerweave 4500, Sheerweave 4550, Sheerweave
4700, Sheerweave 5000, (7% Openness) Siena (10% Openness) GlacierScreen HD1010, E
Screen 7510, Vienne, New Orleans, Sheerweave 2100, Sheerweave 2360, Sheerweave 2710,
Sheerweave 4100 (12% Openness) Natte (14% Openness) A Screen, Sheerweave 3000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A.
SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces,
installation conditions and field measurement for this work.
B.
OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions,
assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A.
INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as
detailed on contract drawings.
B.
ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and
hardware.
C.
CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION:
A.
Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation and
maintenance of the roller shades.
3.04 SCHEDULE:
A.
EXTERIOR WINDOWS:
B.
INTERIOR RELIGHTS:
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 3600-1
COUNTERTOPS
???? 2014
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.
B.
Countertops for manufactured casework.
C.
Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.
B.
Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A161.2 - Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate
Countertops; 1998.
B.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;
2009.
C.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
E.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
F.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
G.
ISFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association; 2001 (2013).
H.
MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual; VII, 2007.
I.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
J.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
K.
WI (CCP) - Certified Compliance Program (CCP); current edition at
www.woodworkinstitute.com/certification.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C.
Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 3600-2
COUNTERTOPS
???? 2014
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
B.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch (HGS,
1.2 mm) nominal thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
f.
Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
g. Manufacturers:
1) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com.
2) Lamin-Art, Inc : www.laminart.com.
3) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar : www.nevamar.com.
4) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Pionite : www.pionitelaminates.com.
5) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com.
6) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm)
thick; covered with matching laminate.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
4. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Custom Grade.
C.
Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous
substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA-2 and NEMA LD
3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and
capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface
coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Dupont : www.corian.com.
2) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com.
3) Avonite Surfaces : www.avonitesurfaces.com.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
12 3600-3
COUNTERTOPS
???? 2014
4) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com.
5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum.
Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick; square edge;
use marine edge at sinks.
Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm)
high.
Skirts: As indicated on drawings.
Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inch
(1.5 mm) nominal sheet thickness.
1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.
2. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high face, 1/2
inch (12 mm) return to face of case; reinforced with hardwood or steel.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius coved joint to
countertop; square top edge with 1 inch (25 mm) wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch
(12 mm) turndown;
4. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch (100 mm) high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;
minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B.
Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.
C.
Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
D.
Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch (25 mm) except where top butts
against cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B.
Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches (3657 mm) long in one piece; join pieces with
adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
D.
Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches (3657 mm) long in one piece including nosings
and back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that
dimension are permitted.
1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.
2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where
indicated on drawings.
3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.
4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire
bottom surface.
E.
Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 3600-4
COUNTERTOPS
???? 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B.
Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board
of 5/8 inch (16 mm).
C.
Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.
D.
Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), maximum.
B.
Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum; 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum.
C.
Field Joints: ___ inch (1/32 mm) wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 4840-1
FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS
???? 2014
SECTION 12 4840
FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
Section includes: [Entrance matting systems, including recessed and surface mounted
aluminum foot grids]
B.
Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:
C.
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
D.
2. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.
E.
3. Section 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.
F.
4. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this
specification section to extent indicated. The Standards listed here are identified with a
designation number, title or other designation established by the issuing authority.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C.
ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method)
1. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux
2. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt
3. LEED-NC version 3
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Performance Requirements: Provide [recessed aluminum entrance floor mat system], which
has been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer
without defects, damage or failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B.
Product data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification sheet and installation
instructions for specified products. Include methods of installation and substrate preparation for
each type of substrate.
C.
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components,
including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.
D.
Samples: Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat, frames and
accessories required. Provide sample of mat materials.
E.
Quality Assurance Submittals: (1) Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties, and (2) Manufacturer’s Installation
Instructions.
F.
Closeout Submittals: (1) Cleaning & Maintenance Data (Include methods for maintaining
installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to
finishes and performance), and (2) Warranty.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Installer should be highly experienced in performing work of this section, having
previously done work similar to that required for this project.
1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A.
Ordering: Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
12 4840-2
FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS
???? 2014
B.
Delivery: Deliver materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging.
C.
Storage: Store materials at temperature and in humidity conditions recommended by
manufacturer and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
D.
Installation: Except as otherwise indicated herein, sequencing or scheduling for performance of
work of this section in relation with other work is Contractor's option. Delay installation of mats
until near time of substantial completion for the project.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temperature: Maintain temperature where products will be installed before, during and after
installation as recommended by Manufacturer.
B.
Field Measurements: Where possible, verify actual measurements by field measuring before
fabrication and include measurements in shop drawings. To avoid construction delays,
coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule based upon construction progress.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.
Provide Nuway® foot grille by Mats Inc., PO Box 839, 37 Shuman Avenue, Stoughton, MA,
02072; telephone 800-628-7462 or 781-344-1536; fax 781-344-1537; www.matsinc.com
<http://www.matsinc.com>.
B.
Forbo Flooring Systems
C.
Amarco Products
2.02 MATERIALS
2.03 RECESSED ALUMINUM FOOT GRILLE MATERIALS
A.
Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway® Tuftiguard Plain with unbuffed rubber wiper strips with
aluminum extrusion only.
B.
Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway® Tuftiguard Design with choice of colored buffed rubber
wiper strips with aluminum scraper bars.
C.
Options for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid:
1. Thickness [7/16”] [11/16”] [linear mats].
2. Wiper Strip Colors: Charcoal selected from manufacturer’s standard colors of buffed
fibered reinforced rubber strip.
3. Scraper Bar Colors: Aluminum
4. Construction: Closed
5. Frame type: [Ramp frame 7/16 inch depth only] [Schluter frame - 7/16] [Deep frame 1 inch
depth]
6. Fabrication for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grids and framing will have the following
characteristics:
a. Size: Fabricate entrance mats as units, but do not exceed manufacturer’s size
recommendation.
b. Joints: Where joints in the entrance mats are necessary space them symmetrically
and away from normal traffic ways.
c. Entrance Mats with Curved Perimeter: Provide full size templates to the manufacturer
to ensure accurate fabrication.
1) Mats Frames: Fabricate frames in single lengths. Where frame dimensions
exceed maximum available lengths, use minimum number of pieces possible
with hairline joints equally spaced.
2) Corners: Miter corners.
3) Protective Coating: Coat surface off frame, which will contact cementitious
material with zinc chromate primer conforming to SAE AMS 3110F.
4) Surface Mounted Frames: Mats Inc. matting systems standard ramp surface
frame, drill and counter sunk to receive floor-fixing screws.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
7.
12 4840-3
FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS
???? 2014
Testing and Standards
a. ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method): 0.79
b. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1
c. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt: Able to sustain 100 hours of salt fog without
any notable changes
d. LEED-NC version 3
1) IEQ Credit 5: Nuway is designed for permanent installation.
2) MR Credit 4: 8.73% pre-consumer and 26.19% post-consumer recycled for
Standard Nuway Model (12mm, Classic, closed construction, charcoal wiper
strips with aluminum scraper bars)
3) MR Credit 4: 4.19% - 8.73% pre-consumer and 12.56% - 26.19% post-consumer
recycled for all other models with aluminum scraper bars.
4) MR Credit 5: Project may be located within 500 miles of the manufacturing
facility.
5) Rolling load Standard Model (12mm, Classic, closed construction, charcoal
wiper strips with aluminum scraper bars): 1,000 lbs/wheel
2.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Sub floor shall be clean and dry, and
within acceptable tolerances.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Sizes: Shop-fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where
not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed
manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning.
Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units
without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
B.
Accessories: Where indicated for recessed or wall-to-wall applications, provide aluminum
framework as recommended by manufacturer General: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s
installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to
ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping hazards.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer’s Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions.
B.
Owner’s Personnel: Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper maintenance procedures.
C.
Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and
until acceptance.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-1
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
SECTION 14 2400
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
A. This Section specifies hydraulic elevators.
B.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section and are
performed by other trades.
1. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: protection of floor
openings and personnel barriers; temporary power and lighting.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork: excavation for cylinder well casing.
3. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, elevator motor and pump foundation,
and grouting thresholds.
4. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: masonry hoistway enclosure, building-in and grouting
hoistway door frames, grouting thresholds.
5. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: pit ladder, divider beams, support for entrances and
rails, and hoisting beam at top of hoistway.
6. Section 07145 - Cementitious Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit.
7. Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and temperature
control of elevator equipment room.
8. Section 16100 - Electrical: electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room;
electrical power for elevator installation and testing; electrical-disconnecting device to
elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system; electrical service for machine
room; machine room and pit receptacles with ground-fault current protection; lighting in
machine room and pit; wiring for telephone service to machine room.
9. Section 16720 - Fire Alarm Systems: fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting
devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine room.
10. Section 16740 - Telephone Systems: ADAAG-required emergency communications
equipment.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at the project site, including but not
limited to the following:
1. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically
Handicapped People
2. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows
5. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
6. ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
7. Applicable Building Codes
8. All other local applicable codes
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
Performance Requirements and General Characteristics:
1. Type: Twin hydraulic plungers.
2. Quantity of Elevators: 1
3. Number of Stops: See drawings
4. Number of Openings: See drawings.
5. Rise: See drawings
6. Rated Load: 2500lbs
7. Rated Speed: 100 feet per minute
8. Car Dimensions (inside): 6' 8" wide x 4' 3" deep
9. Cab height: 8' 0"
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-2
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Hoistway Dimensions: 8' 4" wide x 5' 9" deep
Entrance Dimensions: 3' 6" X 7' 0"
Entrance Type: Single slide
Stopping Accuracy: +/- 1/4" (6.4 mm) under any loading condition or direction of travel.
Main Power Supply: 480 Volts +/- 5% of normal, 3 Phase, with a separate
equipment-grounding conductor.
15. Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.
B.
Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be
automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered,
the car shall park at the last landing served.
C.
Operating Features:
1. Full Collective Operation
2. Single Speed Fan
3. On/Off Light Switch
4. Solid State Starting
5. Remote elevator monitoring REM(r) ready
6. Firefighters' Service Phase I & II
7. Top of Car Inspection
8. Car-Stall Protection
D.
Additional Features
1. Description Emergency return unitA battery-powered emergency return unit shall be
provided so that in the event of a power outage the unit will return the car to the lowest
designated landing, open the doors and shut down.
E.
Door Control Features:
1. Closed Loop Door Operator is a closed loop, microprocessor based door operator system.
The door operator will facilitate smooth operation under varying environmental influences
such as, temperature, wind, friction, and component variation. The processor will monitor
the door's actual position and velocity compared to its desired position and velocity. If
variations are detected in the profile the command will be automatically corrected. The
Closed Loop Door Operator control system shall not require machine room door control
equipment.
2. Door noise not to exceed 58dBA.
3. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a
normal hall or car call.
a. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the
car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructed
by an object or person.
b. Primary door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array
projecting across the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any door
position, the system shall detect as a blockage an opaque object that is equal to or
greater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) in diameter when inserted between the car doors at
vertical positions from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to 71 inches (1800 mm)
above the sill. Under degraded conditions (one or more blocked or failed beams), the
primary protection shall detect opaque objects that are equal to or greater than 4
inches (100 mm) in diameter for the same vertical coverage. If the system
performance is degraded to the point that the 4 inch object cannot be detected, the
system shall maintain the doors open or permit closing only under nudging force
conditions.
c. The door reopening device shall also include a secondary, three dimensional,
triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door opening and extending
into the hoistway door zone. The door opening device will cause the doors to reopen
when it detects a person(s) or object(s) entering or exiting the car in the area between
the hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to the hoistway doors.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-3
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
d.
4.
The size of the secondary protection zone shall vary as the door positions vary during
opening and closing. The width of the zone shall be approximately one-third the size
of the separation between the doors (or door and strike plate for single-slide doors)
and shall be approximately centered in the door separation. In order to minimize
detection of hallway passers-by that are not entering the elevator, the maximum zone
penetration into the entryway shall not exceed 20 inches for any door separation.
Normal penetration depth into the entryway from the car doors shall be about 14
inches for a door separation of 42 inches. The penetration shall reduce proportionally
as the doors close. At door separations of 18 inches or less the secondary protection
system may cease its normal operation since the depth of the zone recedes to where
it is inside the hoistway doors. The vertical coverage of the secondary protection shall
be about 19 inches (480 mm) above the sill to about 55 inches (1400 mm) above the
sill (mid-thigh to shoulder of a typical adult).
e. The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature which will ignore
detection in the secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a significant time
period in the secondary zone without corresponding detection in the primary
protection zone; i.e. a person/object is in the entryway but does not enter. Normal
secondary protection shall be re-enabled whenever detection occurs in the primary
zone.
f.
The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 milliseconds
when both primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor 40
milliseconds when the secondary protection is disabled.
Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable
period of time.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each system proposed for use. Include
the following:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators
2. Cab design, dimensions and layout
3. Hoistway-door and frame details
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements
5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room (BTU)
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:
1. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway
2. Maximum rail bracket spacing
3. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure
4. Loads on hoisting beams
5. Clearances and travel of car
6. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions
7. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames
C.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations and
maintenance manual.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Provide elevators manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years
experience in fabrication of elevators equivalent to those specified. Elevator manufacturer shall
be ISO9002 Certified.
B.
Installer: The manufacturer shall install elevators.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Elevator system design and installation shall comply with the latest
versions of ASME A17.1 and applicable local codes.
D.
Elevator shall be designed in response to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG).
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
E.
14 2400-4
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
Permits and Inspections: Provide licenses and permits and perform required inspections and
tests.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed
upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage
area on or off the premises.
B.
Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevator
contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor will divert the elevator equipment to
the storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the General
Contractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevator
equipment taken to storage by either party, storage, and redeliver to the job site shall not be at
the expense of the elevator contractor.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
The elevator contractor's acceptance is conditional on the understanding that their warranty
covers defective material and workmanship. The guarantee period shall not extend longer than
one (1) year from the date of substantial completion or acceptance thereof by beneficial use,
whichever is earlier, of each elevator. The guarantee excludes: ordinary wear and tear,
improper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causes beyond the control of
the elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or
implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations, adjustments and lubrication of the
elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of 12 months after
the elevator has been turned over for the customer's use. This service shall not be
subcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be performed by
competent employees during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include
emergency 24-hour callback service. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs or
replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other
than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and
installation of the original equipment shall be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.
Provide hydraulic elevators manufactured by
1. Otis Elevator Company (Basis of Design)
2. Schindler Elevator Company
3. Kone Elevator Company
4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator
B.
Substitutions: Not Allowed.
2.02 EQUIPMENT: GENERAL
A.
The hydraulic system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the required
pressure. The power component shall be mounted in the hydraulic-fluid storage tank. The
control valve shall control flow for up and down directions hydraulically and shall include an
integral check valve. A control section including control solenoids shall direct the main valve
and control: up and down starting, acceleration, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up
and down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. All of these functions shall be fully
adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions. System to be provided
with a muffler and a shut-off valve.
B.
A microprocessor-based controller shall be provided, including necessary starting switches
together with all relays, switches, solid-state components and hardware required for operation,
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-5
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
including door operation, as described herein. A three-phase overload device shall be provided
to protect the motor against overloading.
C.
A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of power
failure or for adjusting purposes.
D.
A low voltage monitoring device shall be provided to protect against incorrect operation during
low voltage (building power) occurrences.
E.
Circuit Identification: All electrical wires throughout the elevator electrical system shall be
marked with a unique circuit identifying number appearing four (4) times per foot.
F.
Pressure Switch.
2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS
A.
Plunger(s) and Cylinder(s): Each cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficient
thickness and suitable for the operating pressure. The top of each cylinder shall be equipped
with a cylinder head with a drip ring to collect any oil seepage as well as an internal guide ring
and self-adjusting packing. Each plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of
proper diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Each plunger shall be
provided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder.
Each plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and shall operate freely with minimum
friction.
B.
Car Guide Rails: Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners.
C.
Buffer: Helical coil spring type.
D.
Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system, hall
panels, pit emergency stop switch, and the traveling cable for the elevator car.
E.
Entrances:
1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unit
assembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway
and shall be UL fire rated steel. Sills shall be extruded aluminum.
2. Doors: Entrance doors shall be of hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel
reinforcements.
3. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour.
4. Entrance Finish: #4 Satin stainless steel
5. Entrance Markings: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4 inch x 4 inch (102 mm x 102
mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille adjacent. Markings shall be provided
on both sides of the entrance.
6. Sight Guards:
2.04 EQUIPMENT CAB COMPONENTS
A.
Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform
and car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car-frame platform
assembly must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches
its lower limit of travel.
B.
Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate one-piece
loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as wheeled carts, stretchers, etc. The
platform shall be recessed as needed for scheduled floor finish (i.e; 5/16 inch for tile flooring, or
as required for carpet specified).
C.
Cab Walls: Cab walls to have attached (non-removable) vertical panels with plastic laminate on
front and back.
D.
Car front and door Finish: #4 Satin stainless steel.
E.
Car Top: Made of wood material clad on both sides with a natural finish aluminum panel.
F.
Ceiling: Low-Voltage downlight DC-125 suspended ceiling will have panels laminated with
natural satin finish. Set with incandescent down lights, four per panel.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-6
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
G.
Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6 volt, sealed rechargeable
battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and provide
current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.
H.
Emergency Pulsating Siren: Siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarm
button in the car-operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have a rated sound pressure level of
80 dba at a distance of 3.0 m from the device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more
than 1 second after the switch or push button has been pressed.
I.
Cab Wiring: All wiring on the elevator cab shall use factory wired harnesses with Wago Cage
Clamp plugs and receptacles, and shall terminate behind the car operating panel.
J.
Exhaust Fan: An exhaust fan shall be mounted on the car top.
K.
Utility outlet: A 125-volt 15-ampere utility outlet with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection
shall be furnished on top of the cab.
L.
Handrails: Round Tubular Metal 1-1/2" (38mm) satin stainless steel finish provided on the rear
of the car enclosure.
M. Threshold: Aluminum
N.
Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit where
required by code.
O.
Protective pad: Protective pad hooks and quilted fire retardant protective pad shall be provided.
2.05 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES
A.
Car-Operating Panel: A panel shall be provided which contains all push buttons, key switches,
and message indicators for elevator operation. Each push button shall have Braille and raised
floor markings provided.
B.
Car Fixture Finish: Satin stainless steel
C.
Standard Fixture: Applied car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round
metal mechanical illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked to correspond to
the landings served, an emergency call button, door open and door close buttons, and switches
for lights, inspection and the exhaust fan. The emergency call button shall be connected to a
bell that serves as an emergency signal. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braille
markings. LED halo illumination with Green LED halo illumination with 1/8" projecting targets.
D.
Car Position Indicator: A digital, LED car position indicator shall be integral to the car operating
panel.
E.
A hands free telephone shall be provided which is designed in response to ADAAG
requirements integral with the car operating panel.
F.
Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for
elevator operation. Raised floor markings with Braille shall be provided for each push-button.
Hall fixtures shall have a satin stainless steel finish.
G.
Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to tell a passenger that the car is
either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator.
H.
Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the
car entrance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Use field dimensions to examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under
which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Installation of all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere by others.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
14 2400-7
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
???? 2014
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A.
The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the Owner or
Owner's representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevator
contractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
31 3116-1
TERMITE CONTROL
???? 2014
SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Chemical soil treatment.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide
Act; United States Code; 1947 (Revised 2001).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,
intended application rate.
C.
Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.
D.
Record moisture content of soil before application.
E.
Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule .
F.
Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:
1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience.
2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials.
3. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.05 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.
1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage.
Repair damage and, if required, re-treat.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Bayer Environmental Science Corp: www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management.
2. FMC Professional Solutions: www.fmcprosolutions.com.
3. Syngenta Professional Products: www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of
treated soil.
2.02 MIXES
A.
Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive
treatment.
B.
Verify final grading is complete.
3.02 APPLICATION
A.
Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
31 3116-2
TERMITE CONTROL
???? 2014
B.
Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply toxicant at following locations:
D.
Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.
E.
At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.
F.
Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil
penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.
G.
Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.
H.
If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit soil grading over treated work.
END OF SECTION
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
32 3113-1
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
???? 2014
SECTION 32 3113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
B.
Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts.
C.
Manual gates and related hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A121 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire; 2013.
B.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
C.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
D.
ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a.
E.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
F.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013.
G.
ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2011.
H.
ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures; 2010.
I.
CLFMI CLF 2445 - Product Manual; Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; 1997.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,
hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.
D.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts
relative to property lines and easements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual.
B.
Fabric Size: CLFMI Heavy Industrial service.
C.
Intermediate Posts: Type I round.
D.
Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.
B.
Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.
AUDI BIRMINGHAM
BIRMINGHAM, AL
PRAXIS3-13036
32 3113-2
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
???? 2014
C.
Extension Arms: Cast steel galvanized, to accommodate 3 strands of barbed wire, single arm,
vertical.
D.
Hardware for Single Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525
mm) high, 3 for taller gates; fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate in
fully open position.
E.
Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525
mm) high, 3 for taller gates; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete,
active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold
gate in fully open position.
2.03 FINISHES
A.
Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, at 1.7
oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m).
B.
Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M.
C.
Accessories: Same finish as framing.
D.
Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567.
B.
Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.
C.
Set intermediate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish
grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.
D.
Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.
E.
Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.
F.
Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and
diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.
G.
Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch (150 mm) long rail sleeves.
H.
Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves.
I.
Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days.
J.
Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet (30 m) maximum, whichever is
less.
K.
Position bottom of fabric 2 inches (50 mm) above finished grade.
L.
Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15
inches (380 mm) on centers.
M. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.
N.
Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch (25 mm).
C.
Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.
END OF SECTION